Kia 2018 Forte Owner Manual

Kia 2018 Forte Owner Manual
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replacement parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
i
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2017 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Mexico
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
ii
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-7
1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Kia would like to help you get the
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Kia strongly recommends
that you read the entire manual. In
order to minimize the chance of
injury or death. Kia suggests that you
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections of this manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all subjects
located in the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
1 2
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in the warnings and callouts
shown below.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15 percent ethanol, and do not
use gasoline or gasohol containing
any methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol.
1 3
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15 percent.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems
caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
✽ NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
1 4
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
✽ NOTICE
Your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol
or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Introduction
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives Such as
MMT(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not
recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can
reduce vehicle performance and affect
your emission control system. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and damage components
of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may
be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive should
be added to the fuel tank at every
12,000 km (7,500miles) or every
engine oil change is recommended.
Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles
) you may add to the performance,
economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
1 6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
1 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Hood...................................................4-36
2. Head lamp ................................4-95, 7-80
3. Fog lamp ...................................4-98, 7-80
4. Wheel and tire.............................7-50, 8-5
5. Outside rearview mirror......................4-52
6. Front windshield wiper blades ...4-100, 7-44
7. Windows.............................................4-31
8. Front removable towing hook .............6-23
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OYDM016005
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Rear view
1. Door locks ..........................................4-17
2. Fuel filler lid........................................4-38
3. Rear combination lamp ......................7-84
4. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-89
5. Trunk ................................4-22, 4-24, 4-28
6. Antenna............................................4-147
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OYDM016006
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ................................4-18
2. Driver position memory system button ...3-8
3. Outside rearview mirror control ............4-53
4. Central door lock switch .......................4-19
5. Power window lock switch ....................4-35
6. Power window switch............................4-32
7. Hood release lever................................4-36
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ........................................4-57
9. LKAS On/Off button..............................5-67
10. ESC off button ....................................5-39
11. Steering wheel warmer On/Off
Button .................................................4-48
12. BSD On/Off button..............................5-75
13. Steering wheel....................................4-46
14. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever ....................................................4-47
15. Trunk lid release lever.........................4-22
16. Fuel filler lid release lever...................4-38
17. Fuse box .............................................7-65
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
2 4
OYDM016001N
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster................................4-56
2. Lighting control lever ...........................4-95
3. Audio remote control buttons ............4-148
4. Horn.....................................................4-47
5. Driver's front air bag ............................3-46
6. Cruise control button ...........................5-58
7. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-100
8. Ignition switch or
Engine start/stop button .................5-6, 5-8
9. Digital clock .......................................4-142
10. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2
11. Audio ....................................4-162, 4-210
12. Climate control system.........4-109, 4-119
13. Shift lever ........................5-14, 5-18, 5-24
14. Passenger's front air bag ..................3-46
15. Glove box ........................................4-134
16. Parking brake ....................................5-35
17. Cup holder.......................................4-136
18. LCD display control button ................4-58
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OYD016002L
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 MPI Engine
1. Engine oil dipstick ..............................7-33
2. Engine oil filler cap.............................7-34
3. Engine coolant reservoir ....................7-35
4. Radiator cap.......................................7-36
5. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................7-38
■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 GDI Engine
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ......7-39
7. Air cleaner ..........................................7-40
8. Positive battery terminal.....................7-47
9. Negative battery terminal ...................7-47
10. Fuse box ..........................................7-67
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
2 6
OYDM076017/OYDM076078
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Gasoline Gamma 1.6T-GDI Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir ....................7-35
2. Engine oil filler cap.............................7-34
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir.................7-38
4. Air cleaner ..........................................7-40
5. Fuse box ............................................7-67
6. Negative battery terminal ...................7-47
7. Positive battery terminal.....................7-47
8. Engine oil dipstick ..............................7-33
9. Radiator cap.......................................7-36
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-39
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OJFA075002
2 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-8
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . 3-34
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
• Occupant detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation
and non-inflation conditions of the air bag). . . . . . 3-52
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bagequipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward /
backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(for driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat)
(5) Driver position memory system*
(6) Headrest
Manual seat
Front passenger’s seat
• 5 Door
(7) Seat adjustment, forward /
backward
(8) Seatback recliner
(9) Headrest
Power seat
Rear seat
• 4 Door
(10) Armrest
(11) Headrest
(12) Seatback folding lever
(trunk, for 4 Door)*
(13) Seatback folding lever
(for 5 Door)
OYDM036001N
3 2
* : if equipped
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals.
WARNING
- Driver responsibility for
passengers
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sitting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
1KMN3661
The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
of the seatback and seatback
adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while
still maintaining comfortable
control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do
so could result in air bag inflation injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Small Objects
Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat
and the center console. Your
hands might be cut or injured
by the sharp edges of the seats
mechanism.
Feature of Seat Leather
• Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a natural substance, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature and
humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driving
comfort and stability.
3 4
• Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
product.
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
CAUTION
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles or abrasions which appear
naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.
OYDDSA2002
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unexpected
Seatback angle
Seat Cushion height
(for driver's seat)
seat movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
OYDDSA2003
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
OYDDSA2004
To change the height of the seat
cushion push the lever upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, push the
lever up several times.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support
(for driver`s seat, if equipped)
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switch located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
WARNING - Unattended
OYDDSA2008
Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion
of the switch to decrease support.
children
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equipment.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
When in operation, the power seatconsumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.
3 6
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Seatback angle
Seat cushion height
(for driver's side)
OYDDSA2005
OYDDSA2006
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OYDDSA2007
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion. Pull
the rear portion of the control switch
up to raise or down to lower the rear
part of the seat cushion. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for power seat)
OYDDSA2008
OYDDSA2014
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the driver's
seat. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch to decrease
support.
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driver
seat position with a simple button
operation. By saving the desired position into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the
desired seat position memory will
need to be re-saved.
3 8
WARNING - Driver position memory system
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control
of your vehicle, and an accident
causing death, or serious injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Engine Start/Stop button is ON or
igintion switch is on.
2. Adjust the driver seat to position
comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The system will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
Recalling positions from memory
1. To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
positions.
2. To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
positions.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver seat while the system is recalling the stored position will cause the
movement to stop and move in the
direction that the control switch is
moved.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
With the shift lever in the P position,
the system will move the driver's seat
automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the ignition key is
removed and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the OFF position and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest (for front seat)
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
Adjusting the height up and down
OMG038400
OYDDSA2009
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
3 10
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal and installation
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
■ Type A
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
OYFH034205
✽ NOTICE
OYD034100
■ Type B
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
OYD034102
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
■ Type A
Seatback pocket
WARNING - Headrest
OYD034101
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to the
head or neck, always make sure
the head rest is locked into position and adjusted properly after
reinstalling.
■ Type B
OYDDCO2051
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s
seatback.
WARNING - Seatback
OYD034103
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline switch or lever (3).
3 12
pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy
objects in the front passenger
seatback could also interfere
with the air bag sensing system.
Safety features of your vehicle
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest (for rear seat)
ONF03940I
The rear seat is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
OYDDSA2012
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING - Folded
OYDDSA2013
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (1) while pulling the
headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height and ensure that it locks in
position.
3 14
OYDDSA2019
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Seatback
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating
position and no seat belts are
available for use. This could
result in serious injury or death
in case of an accident or sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
OYDDSA2016
OYDDSA2017
To fold the rear seatback :
• 4 door
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing is in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
4. Open the trunk.
OYDDSA2018
5.Pull the lock release lever (1) and
fold the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
If the seat belt locks after unfolding
the rear seatback, pull out the
locked seat belt, release it then pull
it out again.
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
If you can not see the red line at
the folding lever, it means the seatback is locked completely.
OYDDSA3042
• 5 door
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear headrests to lowest
position.
3. Pull the lock release lever (1) and
fold the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
4. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked in
place. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always
be sure it has locked into position by
pushing on the top of the seatback.
3 16
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place. When you return
the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked
into position by pushing on the top
of the seatback.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
3. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback folding lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position.
WARNING - Rear seatback
When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt cannot protect the
occupant in a crash.
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly protect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning (if equipped)
OYDESA2035CN
As a reminder to the driver, the driver’s seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
ON regardless of belt fastening.
3 18
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate until
the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 15 km/h (9
mph), the illuminated warning light
will start to blink until you drive under
10 km/h (6 mph).
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20 km/h (12
mph) the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
B180A01NF-1
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
Safety features of your vehicle
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat belts can
cause serious injuries in an accident.
OMG035038
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of
another collision.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
B200A01NF
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips. If the lap belt is located too
high on your waist, it may increase
the chance of injury in the event of a
collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt
buckle should be over the belt while
the other arm should be under the
belt as shown in the illustration.
3 20
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place an infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section.
To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
Safety features of your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
OYDDSA2021
B210A01NF-1
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) of the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
OXMA033101
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts.
1. Retractor pre-tensioner
The retractor pre-tensioner, which is
a supplement system of the seat
belts. The purpose of the retractor
pre-tensioner is to tighten the shoulder belt against the occupant's upper
body in certain frontal collisions.
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)
The Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD) is a supplemental system of
the seat belts. The purpose of the
EFD is to tighten the lap belt against
the occupant's pelvis in certain
frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions),
the pre-tensioner may activate and
pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates,
the load limiter inside the retractor
pre-tensioner will release some of the
pressure on the affected seat belt.
3 22
ODMESA2024
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow all
of the important information and
precautions about your vehicle's
occupant safety features - including seat belts and air bags - that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts properly.
✽ NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Skin irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air
bag warning light ( ) on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned to the ON
position, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt does
not work properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if the SRS air bag
has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air
bag warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, or if it remains illuminated after
illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please have
an authorized Kia dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
WARNING - Hot pretensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use
of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
3 24
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened snug on the hips
and as low as possible. Periodically
check belt fit. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to
your child's neck, throat and
face.
Safety features of your vehicle
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE on the hips, not across
the abdomen.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front
seats should be in an upright position
when the vehicle is moving. A seat
belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
3 26
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched Seat
belts
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A
caught
or
pinched
webbing/buckle may become
damaged and could fail during a
collision or sudden stop.
WARNING
Seatbelts can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up
in sunny weather. They could
burn infants and children.
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children who are not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat
belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standard of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by
seat belt, or by a tether anchor
and/or LATCH anchors.
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING - Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING - Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
When the child restraint system is not
in use, store it in the luggage area or
fasten it with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Holding
children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
Using a child restraint system
Rear- facing child restraint system
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
WARNING - Unattended
OTQ037038
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3 28
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The vehicle can heat
up very quickly, resulting in
injuries to the child in the vehicle.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufacturers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installation of the child restraint system which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
OEN036101
E2MS103005
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder
belt around or through the restraint,
following the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the seat
belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emergency.
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
OEN036102
OEN036103
OEN036104
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place. If it is
not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting
to pull more of the seat belt out of
the retractor. If you cannot, the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode.
3 30
Safety features of your vehicle
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each time a
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchorage system
• 4 Door
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether
anchor.
OYDESA4022
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the Auto
Lock mode, the child restraint
can move when your vehicle
turns or stops suddenly.
• 5 Door
OYDDSA3043
Child restraint hook holders are located on the package tray (4 Door) or the
floor behind the rear seat (5 Door).
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
WARNING - Tether strap
OTF030030N
1.Route the child restraint seat tether strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under
the headrest (remove the headrest
and the re-install it) and between
the headrest posts, otherwise
route the tether strap over the top
of the seatback.
3 32
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
B230D01NF
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Safety features of your vehicle
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
OTF030031N
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints.
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child strangulation.
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Their locations
are shown in the illustration.There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors
buckle the shoulder lap belt, then lock
the retractor and pull the belt to remove
the slack in the belt so it lies flat against
the vehicle seat.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCHcompatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat
from side to side. Also try to tug the seat
forward. Check to see if the anchors
hold the seat in place.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side air bag
Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYDESA2024CN
3 34
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side collision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact
and the density and stiffness of the
vehicles or objects which your
vehicle hits in the collision. Though,
factors are not limited to those
mentioned above. Airbags deploy
depending on the severity and
angle of the impact.
Airbags do not deploy in every
impact situation.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side and
curtain air bags will remain inflated
longer to help provide protection
from ejection, especially when used
in conjunction with the seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which a
collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel.
3 36
WARNING - Airbag
Inflation
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control of the your vehicle. A distance of at least 25cm (10")
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended. Failure
to do so can result in airbag
inflation injuries to the driver.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest
to both the seat belt and the air bag,
as well as from breathing the smoke
and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible after the impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to smoke and
powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic,They may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is forbidden
- Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after air bag inflation. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING
Do not install or place any
accessories near air bag
deployment areas, such as the
instrument panel, windows, pillars, and roof rails. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles if the airbag inflates.
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the
child.
1JBH3051
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
Air bag warning light
SRS components and functions
W7-147
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
3 38
OTF032049N
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM) /
Rollover sensor
Safety features of your vehicle
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
after which the air bag warning light
should go out.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia
dealer inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B01L
The air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Driver’s front air bag (3)
Passenger’s front air bag
B240B02L
B240B03L
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately
starts
deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
3 40
B240B05L
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the air bag
deploys.
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Occupant detection system
Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the ignition key. Never
remove or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. Failure to heed this
warning will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
OYDNSA2037
Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. The driver's front air bag is not
affected or controlled by the occupant detection system.
Main components of occupant
detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
If the front passenger seat is occupied
by a person that the system determines to be of adult size, and he/she
sits properly (sitting upright with the
seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if
necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center facia
panel. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the
floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection
by the air bag and the safety belt.
3 42
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the occupant
detection system
Devices
PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2
Off
Off
Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*3 *4
On
Off
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
On
Off
Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
Activated
WARNING - ODS system
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the occupant
detection system (ODS) and
may result in the deactivation of
front passenger air bag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than
the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
B990A08O
1KMN3663
1KMN3665
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never sit with the hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never place the feet on the
dashboard.
OVQ036014N
1KMN3662
1KMN3664
- Never place the feet on the
front passenger seatback.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never lean on the door or center console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 44
Safety features of your vehicle
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.
WARNING - “AIR BAG
B990A01O
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. The driver must
instruct the passenger to reposition himself in the seat. Failure
to properly position yourself
may lead to air bag deactivation
resulting in air bag non-deployment in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's
front air bag will not deploy.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat covers or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - ODS
Interference
• Do not place a heavy load or
an active electronic device (ex.
laptop computer, after market
DMB/navigation/satellite
audio, video game machine,
MP3, etc.) in the front passenger seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
• Do not hang onto the front
passenger seat.
• Do not hang any items such
as seatback table on the front
passenger seatback.
• Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
• Do not place any items under
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occupant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion.
(Continued)
3 46
(Continued)
• Do not spill any liquids on the
seat.
Any of the above could interfere
with the proper operation of the
ODS sensor thereby increasing
the risk of an injury in an accident.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light
on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected
with the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
✽ NOTICE
Air bags can only be used once - have
an authorized Kia dealer replace the
air bag immediately after deployment.
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Driver’s front air bag
OYDDSA2025
Passenger’s front air bag
OYDDSA2026
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.
Safety features of your vehicle
The indications of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's seat position, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restraint in the rear seat.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
section.
Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the front
seat. These may cause a malfunction
of the seat track position sensor.
According to the impact severity,
seating position and seat belt usage,
the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
controls the air bag inflation. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
WARNING - Replacement /
Modifications
The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replacement or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt alone.
Rear impact
1JBB3520
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Side impact
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
1JBA3514
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.
Rollover
1JBA3522
3 48
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - No attaching
objects
No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers)
should be placed over or near
the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box. Such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle
is in a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy. Do
not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
WARNING
Never place or insert any object
into any small opening near
side airbag labels attached to
the vehicle seats. When the air
bag deploys, the object may
affect the deployment and
result in unexpected accident
or bodily harm.
Side air bag
Front
OYDDSA2027
The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat
belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on the
crash severity of impact.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side air bag
sensor when the ignition switch
is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side air bag.
OYDDSA2037
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while the
vehicle is in operation.
For best protection from the side air
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag,
both front seat occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
3 50
If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Inform that your vehicle is equipped
with side air bags and an occupant
detection system.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side air
bag inflates.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not hang heavy items on
the coat hooks for safety reasons.
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
OYDDSA2039
OYDDSA2038
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the severity
of impact.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact situations,
collisions from the front or rear of the
vehicle or in most rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window, or place
objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.
WARNING - No attaching
objects
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag
system. This should only be done by
an authorized Kia dealer.
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Inflation and noninflation conditions of the air
bag)
Air bag collision sensors
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
1
2
3
OYDM036004/OYDDSA2029/OYDM036006/OYDDSA2031
(1) SRS control module /
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
3 52
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Pressure side impact sensor
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious personal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the
air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, body or B pillar where side
collision sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards
or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your
vehicle’s collision and air bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
1JBA3513
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the severity of impact of the front collision.
3 53
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3516
OYDDSA2040
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision
sensors depending on the severity of
impact resulting from a side impact
collision.
3 54
Although the front air bags (driver's
and front passenger's air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact.
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate only in side
impact collisions or rollover situations, but they may inflate in other
collisions if they side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
1JBA3515
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.
Safety features of your vehicle
OED036100
1JBA3516
1JBA3521
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, front air bag deployment
would not provide additional occupant protection.
• In a slant or angled collision, the
force of impact may direct the
occupants in a direction where the
air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and
thus the sensors may not deploy
any air bags.
3 55
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3517
1JBA3522
1JBA3518
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly
replaced by such “under-ride” collisions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 56
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel must
be performed by an authorized Kia
dealer. Improper handling of the SRS
system may result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
3 57
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
OYDM036015
OYDNSA2033
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
3 58
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:42 PM
Page 1
Features of your vehicle
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Trunk (4 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Smart trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Tailgate (5 Door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-18
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:42 PM
Page 2
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Tilt and telescoping steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• FLEX STEER (5door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 door) . . 4-102
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
• LCD window Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
LCD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Over view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Trip information (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• LCD Modes (for Type B, C instrument cluster) . . . 4-67
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Interior light welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
9/11/2017
12:42 PM
Page 3
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Luggage tray (5 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Ventilated seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• LCD monitor (clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Covering shelf (5 Door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Glass antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Steering wheel audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
4
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:28 PM
Page 4
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
OYDDCO2001
OYDDCO2231/OYDECO2231
Used to start the engine, lock and
unlock the doors.
WARNING - Aftermarket
keys
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to operate causing possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
4 4
Type B
To unfold the key, press the release
button and the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
CAUTION - Key button
operation
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:28 PM
Page 5
Features of your vehicle
Type C
WARNING - Ignition key
■ Type C
OYDDCO2002
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
(Smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with a manual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start
button. The key would enable
children to operate power windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily
injury or death.
4 5
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 6
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Smart key functions
Locking
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors. Also,
you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
OYDDCO2007
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a
smart key are similar to the remote
keyless entry. (Refer to the "Remote
keyless entry" in this chapter.)
4 6
OYDDCO2008
Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors
closed and any door unlocked, locks
all the doors. The hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to indicate that all doors
are locked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make
sure that a door has locked or not,
you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside door handle.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 7
Features of your vehicle
Even though you press the button,
the doors will not lock and the chime
will sound for 3 seconds if any of the
following occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
• Any door except the trunk/tailgate
is opened.
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's
outside door handle with all doors
closed and locked, unlocks the driver's door. The hazard warning lights
will blink and the chime will sound
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
Pressing the button in the front passenger's outside door handle with all
doors closed and locked, unlocks all
the doors. The hazard warning lights
will blink and the chime will sound
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed information refer to "Starting the engine
with a smart key" in section 5.
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will
not be able to start the engine. Tow
the vehicle, if necessary, and contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If
you lose a smart key, you should
immediately take the vehicle and
key to your authorized Kia dealer
to protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile twoway radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
4 7
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 8
Features of your vehicle
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
call, receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain
adequate
distance
between the two devices.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function properly.
4 8
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 9
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Remote keyless entry system
operations
■ Type A
OYDDCO2003
■ Type B
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button
is pressed. If all doors (and trunk/tailgate) are closed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once to indicate that
all doors (and trunk/tailgate) are
locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed
once more within 4 seconds, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to confirm
that the door is locked.
However, if any door remains open,
the hazard warning lights (and/or the
chime) will not operate. But if all
doors are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the
unlock button is pressed once. The
hazard warning lights will blink (for
smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once more within 4
seconds. The hazard warning lights
will blink (for smart key, the chime
also sounds) twice again to indicate
that all doors are unlocked. After
pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
OYDDCO2004
4 9
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 10
Features of your vehicle
Trunk/tailgate open (3)
(if equipped)
The trunk/tailgate is opened if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second.
Once the trunk/tailgate is opened and
then closed, the trunk/tailgate will lock
automatically.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard
warning lights blink for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for
more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the
horn and lights, press any button on
the transmitter.
4 10
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or
smart key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is
close to a radio transmitter such as
a radio station or an airport which
can interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key)
does not work properly, open and
close the door with the ignition key. If
you have a problem with the transmitter (or smart key), contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the transmitter could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone. This
is especially important when the
phone is active such as making call,
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain
adequate
distance
between the two devices.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 11
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Type A
1. Pry open the transmitter cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
Battery replacement
■ Type A
OYDDCO2005
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
■ Type B, C
Type B
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OYDDCO2006
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is
not working properly, try replacing the
battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
4 11
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 12
Features of your vehicle
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or
static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter or smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
•
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
4 12
CAUTION - Transmitter
Immobilizer system
damage
The transmitter or smart key can
malfunction if dropped, exposed
to moisture, static electricity,
heat or direct sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry
Canada
licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
OHD046100
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
that the ignition key is valid.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 13
Features of your vehicle
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
Your Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Keep each key separately in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
4 13
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 14
Features of your vehicle
Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator (
) goes off after blinking 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only available from an authorized Kia dealership. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
(
) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
4 14
3. To enter the first digit (in this
example “2”), turn the ignition
switch to the ON and ACC position
twice. Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3
seconds and 10 seconds (for
example, for “3”, turn the ignition
ON and ACC 3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 15
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the
system provides an audible alarm with
blinking of the hazard warning lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and
trunk/tailgate) and engine hood
are closed and latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmitter (or smart key).
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, trunk/tailgate or
engine hood remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t
operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if all doors,
trunk/tailgate and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning
lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handles with the smart key in
your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the door and try again to
lock the doors.
If trunk/tailgate or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights won’t operate and theftalarm will not arm. Close the
trunk/tailgate or engine hood. The
hazard warning lights blink once
and theft-alarm arms.
The theft-alarm system can be activated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 15
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 16
Features of your vehicle
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the
remaining
passenger(s)
leaves the vehicle. If any door (or
trunk/tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after
the system enters the armed
stage, the system will be disarmed
to prevent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the mechanical key or transmitter (or smart key).
• The trunk/tailgate is opened without using the mechanical key or
transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 27 seconds (2times). To
turn off the system, unlock the doors
with the transmitter (or smart key).
4 16
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
- The ignition switch is in the "ON"
position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or trunk/tailgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait
for 30 seconds. Then the system
will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 17
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Unlock
Unlock
Lock
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key
(or smart key). (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the
door.
Lock
✽ NOTICE
OYDDCO2009
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a
key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock
automatically.
(if
equipped with power door locks)
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once
to unlock the driver’s door and
once more within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors. (if equipped with
power door locks)
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
• Be careful that someone’s body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
WARNING
If people must spend a longer
time in the vehicle while it is
very hot or cold outside, there
is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people in it.
CAUTION
Do not open and close the door
repeatedly if unnecessary or
with excessive force.
Such
action can damage the vehicle
door.
4 17
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 18
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
Lock
Unlock
OYDDCO2010
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock
button (1) to the "Unlock" position.
The red mark (2) on the button will
be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the "Lock" position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.
4 18
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in the lock position, the
button will unlock and the door will
open. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
(or if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened. (if
equipped)
✽ NOTICE
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle,
try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
WARNING
Do not pull the inner door handle of driver’s(or passenger’s)
door while the vehicle is moving.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 19
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
■ Driver's door
OYDM046401N
■ Passenger’s door
• Press the switch to the "Unlock"
position (2), all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock when the "Lock"
position (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed. (if equipped)
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the
door.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a
door when something is
approaching can cause damage or injury.
OUB041180N
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• Press the switch to the "Lock" position (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
4 19
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 20
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unattended
children /
animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
4 20
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock
when an impact causes the air bags
to deploy.
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 14
km/h (9 mph). And all doors will be
automatically unlocked when you
turn the engine off or when you
remove the ignition key. (if equipped)
An authorized Kia dealer can activate or deactivate some auto door
lock/ unlock features as follows;
• Auto door unlock by using the driver's door lock button
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the transaxle shift lever out of P
(Park) or into P (Park)
• Auto door unlock when the ignition
key is removed from the ignition
switch (for smart key, when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
turned to the OFF position)
If you want to activate or deactivate
some door lock/unlock feature, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 21
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
Lock
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
Unlock
WARNING - Rear door
OYDDCO2012
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole and turn it to the lock ( ) position. the child safety lock (1) located
on the rear edge of the door to the
lock position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, rear door
will not open even when the inner
door handle is pulled.
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
4 21
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 22
Features of your vehicle
TRUNK (4 DOOR)
Opening the trunk
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
CAUTION
OYDDCO2014
OYDM046003N
• Press the trunk unlock button for
more than 1 second on the transmitter (or smart key).
• Press the button on the trunk handle with the smart key in your possession.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
4 22
• To open the trunk from inside the
vehicle, pull the trunk lid release
lever.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to attached hardware if the trunk
is not closed prior to driving.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 23
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then
press down on it until it locks. To be
sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull
it up again.
WARNING - Exhaust
Fumes
The trunk lid should always be
kept completely closed while
the vehicle is in motion. If it is
left open or ajar, poisonous
exhaust gases may enter the
car and serious illness or death
may result.
WARNING
No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time.
The trunk is a very dangerous
location in the event of a crash.
WARNING
Emergency trunk safety release
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
power trunk. Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
OYD046004L
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency trunk release lever located inside the trunk. If someone is
inadvertently locked in the trunk,
moving the handle in the direction of
the arrow will release the trunk latch
mechanism and open the.
No one should be allowed to occupy
the trunk at any time. The trunk is a
very dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution,
especially while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 23
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 24
Features of your vehicle
SMART TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with notouch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
OYDM046318N
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened with
no-touch activation using the Smart
Trunk system.
4 24
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is continuously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and 1.5 m
from the front door handles. (for
vehicles equipped with Welcome
Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk,
(1) Change the LCD modes to User
setting mode
(2) Select the Door mode
(3) Check the Smart Trunk.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Windows" in this chapter
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 25
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
OYDM046319C
OYDM046320N
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (50~100 cm (20~40 inches)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound for about 3 seconds to alert you the smart key has
been detected and the trunk will open.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the trunk will open.
✽ NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.
• Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out
when opening the trunk on
the slope way. It may cause
serious injury.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children may
inadvertently open the Smart
Trunk while playing around the
rear area of the vehicle.
• Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the trunkbefore
opening or closing the trunk.
• Make sure to deactivate the Smart
trunk function when washing your
vehicle.
Otherwise, the trunk may open
inadvertently.
4 25
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 26
Features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart Trunk
function using the smart key
OYDDCO2007
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open
4. Alarm
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
4 26
✽ NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Trunk function
will be deactivated temporarily.
But, if you do not open any door
for 30 seconds, the smart trunk
function will be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or trunk open button (3) when
the Smart Trunk function is not in
the Detect and Alert stage, the
smart trunk function will not be
deactivated.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 27
Features of your vehicle
Detecting area
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 50~100 cm (20~40
inches) from the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked
on a slope or unpaved road, etc.
OYD046052L
4 27
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 28
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE (5 DOOR)
✽ NOTICE
Opening the tailgate
Closing the tailgate
In cold and wet climates, tailgate
lock and tailgate mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.
CAUTION
OYDDCO3232
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the transmitter (or
smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle and
pulling it up.
• When all doors are lock if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key
is pressed for more than 1 second,
the tailgate is unlocked. Once the
tailgate is opened and then closed,
the tailgate is locked automatically.
4 28
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the tailgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the tailgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OYDDCO3233
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are safely
out of the way before closing the tailgate.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 29
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
tailgate latch and striker while
closing the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents
and all windows open so that
additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
WARNING - Riding in
cargo area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident
or sudden stops, occupants
should always be properly
restrained.
Emergency tailgate safety
release
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
tailgate latch and striker while
closing the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
OYDDCO3234
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment. The tailgate can be opened by
doing as follows:
1. Input the machanical key into the
hole.
2. Push the machanical key to the
right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
4 29
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 30
Features of your vehicle
You and your children should be fully
aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever
and how to open the tailgate in case
you are accidently locked inside the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
4 30
✽ NOTICE
Use the release lever for emergencies
only. Use with extreme caution,
especially while the vehicle is in
motion.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:29 PM
Page 31
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic
power
window
UP*/DOWN*
(7) Power window lock button*
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OYDM046105N
4 31
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 32
Features of your vehicle
Power windows (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s window. The driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately 2.5 cm (1
inch). If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly
reduce the size of the sunroof opening.
If the window cannot be close
because it is blocked by objects,
remove the objects and close the
window.
4 32
CAUTION
Do not install any accessories
in the area of windows. It may
impact jam protection.
Window opening and closing
(if equipped)
OYDDCO2017
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 33
Features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 second
after the window is completely
closed.
OYDDCO2018
OYDECO2224CN
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull up the switch to the opposite
direction of the window movement.
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
4 33
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 34
Features of your vehicle
OUN026013
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm. (1 in.)
4 34
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the "auto up" feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm
(0.16 in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and
will not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn't activate while resetting
the power window system.
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 35
Features of your vehicle
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
CAUTION
- Opening/closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power winOYDM046402N
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passengers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock position (pressed).
When the power window lock
switch is pressed:
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control
can operate the front passenger's power window.
• The rear passenger's control
cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.
dows
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock button
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
• Do not extend a face or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
4 35
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 36
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
Closing the hood
OYDM046008
OYDDCO2020
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P(Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the
1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for
manual transaxle, and setting the
parking brake.
4 36
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the secondary latch (1) left side and lift the
hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30
cm above the closed position and
let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.
4. Check that the hood has engaged
properly. If the hood can be raised
slightly, it is not properly engaged.
Open it again and close it with a little more force.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 37
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
CAUTION
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are
removed from the engine compartment and surrounding body
sheet metal. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present
could result in damage to the
engine, sheet metal or the
impacted objects.
The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenever
you inspect the engine compartment.
This will prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.
4 37
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 38
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it "clicks" one time. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
WARNING - Refueling
OYDDCO2024
OYDDCO2023
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
4 38
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the cap turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 39
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator light will illuminate.
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
WARNING - Fire /
explosion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place
the container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be
maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
4 39
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 40
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling&
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a
lit cigarette in your vehicle while
at a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
4 40
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control system.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 41
Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
OYDM046382
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the
sunroof control lever after the
sunroof is fully opened, closed,
or tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could
occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or property damage.
WARNING
• In order to prevent accidental
operation of the sunroof,
especially by a child, do not
let a child operate the sunroof.
• Do not sit on the top of the
vehicle. It may cause vehicle
damage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sunroof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
WARNING - Sunroof
operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
4 41
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 42
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed, the warning
chime will sound for a few seconds
and a warning image will appear on
the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
■ Type A
Sliding the sunroof
OYD046205L
■ Type B
OYDDCO2026
OYD046197
■ Type C
OYD046198
4 42
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position
and then release it. The sunroof will
slide all the way open.
The sunroof will slide to the recommended open position (about 5 cm
(2 in.) before the maximum slide
open position).
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 43
Features of your vehicle
To open the sunroof to the maximum
slide open position, press the switch
towards the rear of the vehicle once
again and hold it until the sunroof
slide all the way open.
To reduce wind noise while driving,
we recommend you to drive at the
recommended position (about 5 cm
(2 in.) before the maximum slide
open position).
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position
and then release it. The sunroof will
automatically close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
While driving with the sunroof in an
open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and
can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If you experience the noise with the sunroof
open, slightly reduce the size of the
sunroof opening.
Automatic reversal
OYF049215
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
4 43
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/26/2017
7:09 PM
Page 44
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are safely
out of the way before closing
the window to avoid injuries or
vehicle damage.
Objects less than 4 mm (0.16
inch) in diameter caught
between the sunroof glass and
the front window channel may
not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the
window will not stop and
reverse direction.
4 44
Tilting the sunroof
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.
CAUTION - Sunroof
OYDDCO2027
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the sunroof lever forward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
motor damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could
become damaged.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 45
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
OBK049019
When opening the sunroof, the sunshade will also open. Once the sunroof is closed, the sunshade can be
manually closed.
Resetting the sunroof
✽ NOTICE
The sunroof may need to be reset if
the following conditions occur :
- The battery is discharged or disconnected or the sunroof fuse has
been replaced or disconnected.
- The sunroof control lever is not
operating correctly.
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. We
recommend resetting the sunroof
while the engine is running.
2.Close the sunroof completely if
opened
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Move the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close until
the sunroof moves tilt up. Then,
release the lever.
5.Move the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follow
again :
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during operation, try again from step 2.
6.Release the sunroof control lever
after all operation has completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
the sunroof may operate improperly.
4 45
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 46
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS)
✽ NOTICE
Power steering uses the motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The electric power steering is controlled by the power steering control
unit which senses the steering wheel
torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for better control of
the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort is increased
immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the
system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously when the vehicle is not in
motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal
condition.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur. If the temperature
rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.
(Continued)
4 46
(Continued)
• When the charging system warning light comes on or the battery
voltage is low (when the alternator
or battery does not operate normally), the steering wheel may get
heavy and become difficult to control operate abnormally.
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may
require increased steering effort.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 47
Features of your vehicle
Tilt and telescoping steering
Horn
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control
OYDDCO3028
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3), then
pull up the lock-release lever to lock
(4) the steering wheel in place. Be
sure to adjust the steering wheel to
the desired position before driving.
OYDDCO2030
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
4 47
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 48
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
CAUTION
OYDM046397
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate and notify you on the
LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
If you turn on the ignition again after
turning off your engine in half an
hour (after operating heater button),
the heating system will be maintained in its 'on' condition.
4 48
• Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of the steering
wheel is damaged by a sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
WARNING
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:30 PM
Page 49
Features of your vehicle
When the FLEX STEER mode button is pressed, the selected steering
mode will appear on the LCD window.
Each time you press the FLEX
STEER mode button, the steering
mode will change as follows :
FLEX STEER
(5door, if equipped)
Normal mode
■ Type B
→ Normal → Sport → Comfort
OYDDCO2223
If the FLEX STEER mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD window will change to the previous screen.
OYD046235L
■ Type C
The FLEX STEER controls steering
effort based upon driver's preference
or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button.
OYD046236L
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
4 49
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 50
Features of your vehicle
Sport mode
Comfort mode
■ Type B
■ Type B
OYD046231L
■ Type C
OYD046233L
■ Type C
OYD046232L
OYD046234L
The steering wheel becomes heavier. The sport mode is usually used
when driving on the highway.
The steering wheel becomes lighter.
The comfort mode is usually used
when driving in the city or when parking the vehicle.
4 50
For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while operating
the steering wheel, the LCD display
will change, but steering effort will
not change immediately. After operating the steering wheel, the steering
effort will change automatically to the
selected mode.
Use caution when changing the
steering mode while driving.
When the electronic power steering
is not operating, the flex steering
wheel will not work.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 51
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Night
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control.
Day
OYDDCO2031
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
4 51
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 52
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing which may
damage the mirror.
Indicator
Sensor
OYDM046383
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
4 52
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch (if equipped). The mirror heads
can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 53
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Rearview
Remote control
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
OYDM046403N
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch
should be in the ACC or ON position.
Move the lever (1) to R or L to select
the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding
point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the lever
into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.
4 53
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 54
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
OYDDCO2041
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirrors will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirrors will fold.
4 54
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirrors will fold or unfold
when the door is locked or
unlocked by the transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirrors will fold or unfold
when the door is locked or
unlocked by the smart key.
- The mirrors will fold or unfold
when the door is locked or
unlocked by the button on the
outside door handle.
- The mirrors will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. (if equipped)
CAUTION - Electric type
outside
rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
Do not attempt to fold the electric type outside rearview mirror
by hand because doing so
could cause motor damage or
failure.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 55
Features of your vehicle
OYDDCO2040
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
4 55
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/19/2017
11:29 AM
Page 56
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A / Type B
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Turn signal indicators
■ Type C
6. Warning and indicator lights
7. LCD window
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OYD047404C/OYD047375C
4 56
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 57
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
■ Type A
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
■ Type B
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
OYD046240L/OYD046199L
■ Type C
OYDM046398
The instrument panel illumination
intensity can be adjusted by pressing
the control switch with the headlight
switch in any position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The illumination intensity is shown
on the instrument cluster LCD window.
OYD046200L
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
4 57
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 58
Features of your vehicle
LCD window Control
■ Type A
■ Type B
[Type B]
(1)
: MODE button for changing
modes
(2)
: MOVE button for changing
items
(3)
: SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
Gauges
Speedometer
■ Type A, B
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to "LCD
window" in this chapter.
OYDDDI2018
OYDEDI2003L
■ Type C
The LCD window modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
[Type A]
(1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing
trip modes
(2) RESET : RESET button for resetting items
OYDEDI2004L
The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in
kilometers per hour and/or miles per
hour.
4 58
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 59
Features of your vehicle
Tachometer
The tachometer pointer may move
slightly when the ignition switch is in
ACC or ON position with the engine
OFF. This movement is normal and
will not affect the accuracy of the
tachometer once the engine is running.
■ Type A, B
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
■ Type A, B
■ Type C
CAUTION - Red zone
OYDM046406
■ Type C
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OYDDDI2007/OYDDDI2008
OYDM046405
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.
This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the engine overheats" in chapter 6.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the "H"
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
4 59
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 60
Features of your vehicle
Fuel gauge
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
■ Type A, B
OYDDDI2009
■ Type C
✽ NOTICE - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must
stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the "E
(Empty)" level.
Odometer
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYD046241L/OYD046242L
■ Type C
CAUTION - Low fuel
OYDDDI2010
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is
given in chapter 8. The fuel gauge is
supplemented by a low fuel warning
light, which will illuminate when the
fuel tank is nearly empty.
4 60
Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire, damaging the catalytic
converter.
OYD046243L
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful
to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:31 PM
Page 61
Features of your vehicle
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYD046244L/OYD046245L
■ Type C
•
•
•
•
•
Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Manual transaxle shift
indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which
gear is desired while driving to save
fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th
gear).
✽ NOTICE
When the system is not working
properly, up & down arrow indicator and Gear are not displayed.
OYD046246L
This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.
4 61
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/22/2017
11:49 AM
Page 62
Features of your vehicle
LCD WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
Over view
LCD windows show the following various information to drivers.
- Trip information
- LCD modes (for Type B, C)
- Warning messages (for Type B, C)
■ Type A
Trip information (Trip computer)
OYD046308L
■ Type B
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
OYD046307L
■ Type C
Trip Modes
FUEL ECONOMY
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP B
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
Digital speedometer
(for Type B,C)
OYD046309L
4 62
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
4:43 PM
Page 63
Features of your vehicle
Type A
To change the trip mode, press the
“TRIP” button.
Fuel Economy
■ Type A
- Distance range : 50 ~ 9999 km mi
or 30 ~ 9999.
• If the estimated distance is below
50 km (30 mi.), the trip computer
will display "---" as distance to
empty.
■ Type B
Type B
To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE button ▼.
✽ NOTICE
OYD046106/OYD046107L
■ Type C
OYD046108L
Distance To Empty (1)
• The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6
liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the
vehicle.
4 63
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
4:43 PM
Page 64
Features of your vehicle
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since
the last average fuel economy
reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET button
(Type A : RESET, Type B, C :
) on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel economy is displayed.
4 64
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD window (Refer to “LCD window”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1.6 km/h (1MPH) after refueling more than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or 0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG
(Type A), 0.0 ~ 30.0 L/100km or
0.0 ~ 50.0 MPG (Type B, C)
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
4:43 PM
Page 65
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B
■ Type A
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button (Type A : RESET,
Type B, C :
) on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
■ Type B
OYD046101/OYD046102L
■ Type C
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET button (Type A :
RESET, Type B, C :
) on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
OYD046103L
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
4 65
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
4:43 PM
Page 66
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET button (Type A :
RESET, Type B, C :
) on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
Digital speedometer
One time driving information mode
■ Type B
■ Type B
OYD046297
✽ NOTICE
■ Type C
OYD046303L
■ Type C
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
4 66
OYD047293C
OYD046304L
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 67
Features of your vehicle
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automatically. The information provided is calculated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below 1
km (1 mi), the distance to empty (3)
will display as "---" and a refuel message will appear (4).
LCD Modes (for Type B, C
instrument cluster)
(3) Audio mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
(4) Service mode
This mode informs of service interval
(mileage or days) and pressure status of each tire.
OYD046310L
(1) Trip Computer mode
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
(2) Turn By Turn mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
(5) Master warning mode
This mode informs of warning messages related to washer fluid or malfunction of Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.
(6) User Setting mode
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes,
refer to "LCD window Control" in
this chapter.
4 67
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 68
Features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
A/V Mode (if equipped)
Service Mode
■ Type B
■ Type B
■ Type B
OYD046299
■ Type C
OYD046298
■ Type C
OYD046222L
■ Type C
OYD047295C
OYD046294
OYD046223L
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
4 68
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 69
Features of your vehicle
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
■ Type B
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the SELECT/RESET button
for more than 1 second.
OYD046220L
■ Type C
OYD046221L
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position.
4 69
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 70
Features of your vehicle
■ Type B
✽ NOTICE
User Settings Mode
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
■ Type B
OYD046218L
■ Type C
OYD046210L
■ Type C
OYD046219L
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service in OFF” message is displayed on the LCD window.
4 70
OYD046211L
On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 71
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Do not adjust the User Setting
while driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause severe
personal injury or accidents.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
• Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS, if equipped) : To adjust the
sensitivity of the Lane Keeping
Assist System.
- Lane Departure / Standard LKA /
Active LKA For more information,
refer to the "Lane Keep Assist
System" in chap ter 5.
• Autonomous Emergency Braking
system (AEB,if equipped) : To activate or deactivate the Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB).
For more information, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB)" in chapter 5.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW, if
equipped) : To adjust the initial
warning alert time for Autonomous
Emergency Braking system.
- Late/Normal/Early For more information, refer to "Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB)" in
chapter 6.
• Rear Collision Warning (RCW,if
equipped)
- Rear Cross Traffic Alert : To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert system.
For more information, refer to "Blind
Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
- Blind Spot Detection sound : To
activate or deactivate the Blind
Spot Detection sound.
For more information, refer to "Blind
Spot Detection" in chapter 5.
4 71
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 72
Features of your vehicle
Door
• Automatically Lock
- Disable : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
- Enable on Speed : All doors will be
automatically locked when the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h
(9.3 mph).
- Enable on Shift : All doors will be
automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R
(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive)
position.
4 72
• Automatically Unlock
- Disable : The auto door unlock
operation will be canceled.
- Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop
button is set to the OFF position.
- On Shift to P : All doors will be
automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted
to the P (Park) position.
• Two Press Unlock
- Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated. Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
- On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
• Horn Feedback (if equipped)
- Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
- On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
• Smart Trunk (if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the Smart
Trunk system.
For more details, refer to "Smart
Trunk" in this chapter.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 73
Features of your vehicle
Light
• One Touch Turn Signal (if equipped)
- Off: The one touch turn signal function
will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change
signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times
when the turn signal lever is moved
slightly.
For more details, refer to "Light" in
this chapter.
• Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
- If this item checked, the head lamp
delay function will be activated.
• Welcome Light (If equipped)
- If this item checked, the welcome
light function will be activated.
Sound
• Cluster voice guide Vol. (if
equipped) : Adjust the cluster voice
guide volume. (Level 0~3)
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) Sound
(if equipped)
If this item checked, the blind spot
detection sound will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Blind Spot
Detection System" in chapter 5.
• Welcome Sound (if equipped)
If this item checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Convenience
• Seat Easy Access(if equipped)
- None : The seat easy access function is deactivated.
- Normal/Extended : When you turn
off the engine, the driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward short
(Normal) or long (Extended) for
you to enter or exit the vehicle
more comfortably.
If you change the Engine
Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START
position, the driver’s seat will return
to the original position.
For more details, refer to "Driver
Position Memory System" in chapter 3.
4 73
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 74
Features of your vehicle
Service interval (if equipped)
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(km or mi.) and period (months).
- Off : The service interval function
will be deactivated.
- On :You can set the service interval
(mileage and months).
For more details, refer to "Service
Mode" in this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
If it is not available to set service
interval on your vehicle, we recommend that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
4 74
Other features
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off : The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition : The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when driving.
- After Refueling : The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when refueling.
• Fuel Economy Unit
Choose the preferred fuel economy
unit.
• Temperature Unit
Choose the preferred temperature
unit.
• Language (if equipped)
Choose preferred the language.
Warning messages
Warning messages appear on the
LCD to warn the driver. It is located in
the center of the instrument cluster.
The warning message may appear
differently depending on the type of
instrument cluster and some may not
show the warning message at all.
The warning message is shown in
either symbol, symbol and text, or
text type only. You can choose the
preferred language (for Type B only)
by selecting the User setting menu in
LCD mode.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 75
Features of your vehicle
■ Type B
■ Type B
OYD046191
■ Type C
■ Type A
OYD046192
Door Open
• It means that any door is open.
OYD046250L/OYD046197
OYD046193
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type C
OYD046194
OYD046198
Trunk (tailgate) Open
• It means that the trunk (tailgate) is
open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• This warning is displayed if you
turn off the engine when the sunroof is open.
4 75
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 76
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
OYD046205/OYD046206L
■ Type C
■ Type B
OYD046292/OYD046286L
Shift to P (for smart key system and
automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
■ Type C
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
OYD046207L
OYD046287L
Turn on FUSE SWITCH (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch under the steering wheel is OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
Engine has overheated
This warning message illuminates
when the engine coolant temperature is above 120°C (248 °F). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer to
“Overheating” in chapter 6.
4 76
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 77
Features of your vehicle
Press START button while turn steering (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Check Steering Wheel Lock System
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine (for
smart key system and manual transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the clutch pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the clutch pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
4 77
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 78
Features of your vehicle
Key not detected (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, we recommend
that you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 78
Press START button with smart key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽ NOTICE
Check fuse “BRAKE SWITCH”
(for smart key system and automatic
transaxle/transmission)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 79
Features of your vehicle
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Low Fuel
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminates.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
4 79
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 80
Features of your vehicle
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
4 80
Air bag Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the "Seat
Belts" in chapter 3.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 81
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in
chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leak on the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
4 81
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 82
Features of your vehicle
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminates with the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 82
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 83
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - ABS/Brake
Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking thereby increasing the risk of a crash or injury.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
4 83
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 84
Features of your vehicle
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 84
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 85
Features of your vehicle
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
CAUTION - Engine
damage
If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illuminated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to "Engine Oil" in section 7).
If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 85
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 86
Features of your vehicle
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, there may be serious engine damage. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine
is started, turn the engine off
immediately. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 86
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below can cause the
engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 87
Features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk (tailgate) Open
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk (tailgate) is not
closed securely.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
AFLS
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
4 87
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 88
Features of your vehicle
Master Warning Mode
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driver the following situations
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Service reminder and so on.
The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
4 88
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 89
Features of your vehicle
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
ECO Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System" in
chapter 5.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “ECO” mode as
drive mode.
For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode Integrated Control System” in
chapter 5.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
WARNING - Ecominder
Indicator
Do not keep watching the
"ECO" ECOMINDER indicator
while driving as it may distract
you and cause an accident.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 89
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 90
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
4 90
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
"Starting the Engine" in section
5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 91
Features of your vehicle
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
CRUISE
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
SET
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
4 91
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 92
Features of your vehicle
KEY OUT Indicator Light
(if equipped)
KEY
OUT
When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key.
This indicator light blinks:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle and any door is open with the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC or ON position.
- At this time, if you close all doors,
the chime will also sound for
approximately 5 seconds.
- The indicator will go off while the
vehicle is moving.
4 92
LKAS (Lane Keeping
Assistant System)
Indicator (if equipped)
The LKAS indicator will illuminate
when you turn the lane keeping
assistant system on by pressing the
LKAS button.
If there is a problem with the system,
the yellow LKAS indicator will illuminate.
For more details, refer to "LKAS" in
chapter 5.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 93
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
The rearview camera is not a substitute for proper and safe backing-up
procedures. Always drive safely and
use caution when backing up. The
rearview camera may not display
every object behind the vehicle.
OYDM046015
The rear view camera will activate
with the ignition switch on and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
Note- during initial start up, system
may not display instantly due to the
audio system booting up.
2 ~ 4 seconds may be required
before displaying during initial
reverse selection. This occurs when
starting and immediately shifting to
reverse.
This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle
through the UVO audio or navigation
display backing-up.
WARNING - Backing Up &
Using Camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing up. Prior
to entering your vehicle always
do a visual check of the area
behind your vehicle, and before
backing up be aware of your surroundings and supplement the
rear view camera by looking over
your shoulders and checking
your rear view mirrors. Due to the
difficulty of ensuring that the
area behind you remains clear,
always back up slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
4 93
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:32 PM
Page 94
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
4 94
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) will
remain on for approximately 20 minutes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 30 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, It causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
If the headlights are not working
properly have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Don't attempt to inspect or replace
the wiring yourself to prevent malfunction.
Daytime running light
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The position lights or headlights
are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 95
Features of your vehicle
Lighting control
Parking light position (
)
Headlight position (
)
OXM049110
OAM049041
OAM049042
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
When the light switch is in the headlight position (2nd position) the head,
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
4 95
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 96
Features of your vehicle
Auto light position (if equipped)
If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on the
front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.
High beam operation
OYDDCO2042
OAM049044
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
Never place anything over the sensor
(1) located on the instrument panel.
This will ensure better auto-light system control.
Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleaner may leave a
light film which could interfere with
sensor operation.
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
4 96
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 97
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
OAM049043
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released.
The headlight switch does not need to
be on to use this flashing feature.
OAM049045
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
4 97
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 98
Features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in "One
touch turn lamp" of "User setting".
Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, the bulb may be
burned out or have a poor electrical
connection in the circuit.
4 98
Front fog light (if equipped)
OAM049046N
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the
switch (1) to the off position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 99
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Never place anything over the sensor(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better autolight system to turn on and off automatically.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
have system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OYDDCO2042
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO position when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling operates continuously.
4 99
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 100
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
Front
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
OAM049100L
D : Rear wiper/washer control
·
/ON – Continuous wipe
· ---/INT – Intermittent wipe
· O/OFF – Off
Rear ( 5 Door, if equipped)
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
OAM049048N
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· OFF – Off
· MIST – Single wipe
4 100
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is a heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 101
Features of your vehicle
Windshield washers (front)
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
CAUTION - Wiper position
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the off position to stop the auto wiper operation. The wiper may operate
and be damaged if the switch is
set in the AUTO mode while
washing the vehicle.
CAUTION - Wipers &
OYF049101
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever. If
the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level.
If the fluid level is not sufficient, you
add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer
reservoir.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
4 101
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 102
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 door) (if equipped)
OYD044500
OAM049103N
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wipe
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
4 102
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 103
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
glare from the interior lights
may obstruct your view and
cause an accident.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
Map lamp (if equipped)
■ Type A
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
5 seconds after the system is in
armed stage.
OYDM046385
■ Type B
OYDM046384
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp
on or off. This light produces a spot
beam for convenient use as a map
lamp at night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and front passenger.
4 103
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 104
Features of your vehicle
• DOOR (2) :
In the DOOR position, the map
lamp and the room lamp come on
when any door is opened regardless of the ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked by the
transmitter (or smart key), the map
lamp and the room lamp come on
for approximately 30 seconds as
long as any door is not open.
The map lamp and the room lamp
go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors are locked, the
map lamp and the room lamp will
turn off immediately. If a door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ACC or LOCK position, the
map lamp and the room lamp stays
on for about 20 minutes. However,
if a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the map
lamp and the room lamp stays on
continuously. If the type B room
lamp switch is OFF, it doesn't work.
4 104
• OFF (3) : The lights turn off even if
a door is opened.
When the lamp is
turned ON by pressing
the lens (1), the lamp
does not turn off even
if the switch (2) is in the
OFF position.
• ON (4) : The map lamp and the
room lamp stay on at all
times.
Room lamp
OMD040097
To turn the room lamp ON or OFF,
push the switch.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
map lamp, the room lamp will also
turn on or off as follows.
- The room lamp comes on when a
door is opened. The lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds.
- The room lamp comes on for
approximately 30 seconds when
doors are unlocked with a transmitter or smart key as long as the
doors are not opened.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 105
Features of your vehicle
- The room lamp will stay on for
approximately 20 minutes if a
door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK/OFF
position.
- The room lamp will stay on continuously if the door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position.
- The room lamp will go out immediately if the ignition switch is
changed to the ON position or all
doors are locked.
The luggage lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid (tailgate) is open. To
prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk lid (tailgate) securely after using the luggage room.
Luggage room lamp
• 4 Door
OYDDCO2045
• 5 Door
OYDDCO3237
The luggage room lamp comes on
when the trunk (tailgate) is opened.
4 105
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/15/2017
10:15 AM
Page 106
Features of your vehicle
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
OYDECO2046CN
OLM049105
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened. To prevent
unnecessary charging system drain,
close the glove box securely after
use.
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror lamp
is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed
without turning the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage the
sunvisor.
4 106
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 107
Features of your vehicle
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Headlamp welcome
Interior light welcome
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and trunk/tailgate) are
locked and closed, the headlight,
position light and tail light will come
on for 15 seconds if any of the below
is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button (on the transmitter or smart
key), the lights will turn off immediately.
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk/tailgate) are locked and closed,
the room lamp will come on for 30
seconds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off immediately.
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp
(if equipped)
When all doors are locked and
closed, the puddle lamp and pocket
lamp will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off immediately.
4 107
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 108
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to "Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging" in this
section.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster
manually, press the rear window
defroster button again.
Rear window defroster
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYD046017L
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is on.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
4 108
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
front wiper deicer, it will be operating
at the same time you operate the
front windshield defroster.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
9/1/2017
6:43 PM
Page 109
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. Rear window defroster button
OYD046018L
4 109
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:33 PM
Page 110
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
OYD046239L
4 110
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 111
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
OYD046019L
The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Six
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
4 111
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 112
Features of your vehicle
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
Temperature control
OYD046021L
OYD046020L
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
4 112
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OYDDCL2007
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in
the passenger compartment, turn
the knob to the right for warm air or
left for cooler air.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 113
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
OYD046022L
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air position is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of
the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Reduced
Visibility
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
4 113
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 114
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Recirculated
Fan speed control
To turn off the blowers
Air
Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated
air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of
vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
on as this may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in
the oxygen level and/or body
temperature.
4 114
OYDDCL2009
OYDDCL2032
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 115
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OYD046023L
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator light
will illuminate). Press the button again
to turn the air conditioning system off.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
,
position.
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
through the ventilation system,
temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
4 115
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 116
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation in the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, change the
air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
4 116
CAUTION - Excessive AC
While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating and potential engine
damage. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 117
Features of your vehicle
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Heater core
Evaporator
core
OMG075033
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty,
rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 117
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 118
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle’s air conditioning system is under very high pressure.
If proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the air conditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
4 118
CAUTION
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage
to the vehicle may occur.
To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
9/1/2017
6:43 PM
Page 119
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. OFF button
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Mode selection button
6. Fan speed control switch
7. Air intake control button
8. Rear window defroster button
9. Passenger's temperature control knob
10. SYNC button
11. Air conditioning button
12. Climate control display
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the
battery to discharge. It is best to operate the blower when the engine is running.
OYD046024L
4 119
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 120
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air conditioning
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OYD046025L
OYDDCL2012
1. Push the AUTO button. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.
4 120
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23 °C (73 °F ).
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 121
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
OYDDCL2013
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
OYD046026L
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Every time you press the mode
selection button, the mode will
change as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
"Manual climate control system".
4 121
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 122
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
OYD046027L
Air flow is discharged towards the
face and floor.
4 122
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 123
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OYDDCL2006
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OYD046028L
OYD046025L
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in
the passenger compartment, turn
the knob to the right for warm air or
left for cooler air.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the SYNC button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Pressing
the right temperature control button will automatically switch to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature control to adjust the driver side temperature. Operate the right temperature control to adjust the passenger side temperature.
4 123
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 124
Features of your vehicle
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest (HIGH) or lowest
(LOW) temperature setting, the
DUAL mode is deactivated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Operate the driver side temperature control switch. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Air intake control
OYD046029L
The air intake control is used to
select outside (fresh) air position or
recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.
4 124
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 125
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of
the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
WARNING - Reduced
Visibility
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
4 125
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 126
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
Air conditioning
OFF mode
OYD046030L
OYD046031L
OYDDCL2022
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control switch.
To change the fan speed press the
part of the switch for higher
speed or press the
part of the
switch for lower speed.
To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
Press the OFF button to turn off the
air climate control system. However
you can still operate the mode and
air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.
4 126
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 127
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, then set the
fan speed control to the highest
speed.
4 127
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 128
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while
driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures
are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause
engine overheating. Continue
to use the blower fan but turn
the air conditioning system off
if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause
damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should
only be used with the windows
closed.
4 128
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the
position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:34 PM
Page 129
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the (
) or (
)
position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the
temperature of the outside air
and the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
OYD046032L
1. Select any fan speed except "0"
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.
4 129
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 130
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
Automatic climate control
system
To defrost outside windshield
To defog inside windshield
OYD046035L
OYD046033L
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
4 130
OYD046034L
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 131
Features of your vehicle
Defogging Logic
Manual climate control system
Automatic climate control system
To reduce the probability of fogging
up inside of the windshield, the air
intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
position. Logic can be disabled and
enabled by doing following :
OYD046036L
OYD046037L
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defroster position before
pressing the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button (
) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 131
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 132
Features of your vehicle
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture inside the windshield
and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follows. For
example, if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
OYDDCL2029
Auto defogging reduces the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
4 132
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the windshield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 133
Features of your vehicle
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automatically activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button 4
times within 2 seconds while pressing the AUTO button. The indicator
will blink 3 times to notify you that the
system is cancelled. To use the auto
defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽ NOTICE
• When the air conditioning is
turned on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air
conditioning, the indicator will
blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while Auto
defogging system is operating.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
OYD046038L
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
4 133
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 134
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave
valuables in the storage compartment.
Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving.
Center console storage
(if equipped)
Glove box
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle.
These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
OYDDCO2049
OYDDCO2048
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
To open the glove box, push the button
(1) and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.
Always keep the glove box closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING - Glove box
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
4 134
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 135
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass
holder. Such objects can be
thrown from the holder in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
Luggage tray
(5 door, if equipped)
OYDM046399
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out. To close the sunglass holder, push it up. Do not open
the sunglass holder while the vehicle
is moving. The rear view mirror of the
vehicle can be blocked by an open
sunglass holder.
OYDDCO3238
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
Grasp the strap on the top of the
cover and lift it.
4 135
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/15/2017
10:15 AM
Page 136
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Ashtray (if equipped)
WARNING - Ashtray use
Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a
fire.
OYD046040L
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
out.
4 136
Cup holder
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/15/2017
10:15 AM
Page 137
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Sliding armrest (if equipped)
■ Front
When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup
holder.
OYD046041L
■ Rear (if equipped)
OYDECO2226CN
To move forward
Grab the front portion of the armrest
(1) then pull it forward
OYDECO2056CN
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
To move rearward
Push the armrest rearward with your
palm.
4 137
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 138
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after
use. If the vanity mirror is not
closed securely, the lamp will
stay on and could result in battery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
■ Front
• Type A
OYD046043L
OVG049174
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).
4 138
■ Front
• Type B
OYD046042L
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 139
Features of your vehicle
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
)
→
OFF→HIGH(
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn
the seat warmer off.
In particular, the driver must
exercise extreme care for the
following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
4 139
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
9/11/2017
12:42 PM
Page 140
Features of your vehicle
Ventilated seat (if equipped)
The ventilated seat defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• Each time you push the button, the
airflow is changed as follows:
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
→
OFF→HIGH(
CAUTION
OYD046044L
The ventilated seat is provided to
cool or warm the seat during hot or
cold weather by blowing air through
small vent holes on the surface of the
seat and seatback. While the engine
is running, push the rear portion of
the switch (blue color) to cool the
seat, and push the front portion of the
switch (red color) to warm the seat.
When the operation of the ventilated
seat is not needed, keep the switch
in the OFF position.
4 140
• The ventilated seat is a supplementary cooling/heating system. Use the ventilated seat
when the climate control system is on. Using the ventilated
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control
system off could impair the
performance of the ventilated
seat.
(Continued)
)
(Continued)
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the surface of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and prevented from working properly.
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats. The air vent
may not work properly as the
air intake can be blocked.
When the air vent does not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 141
Features of your vehicle
Power outlet (if equipped)
■ Type A
OYD046046L
■ Type B
Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged periods
of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 15A in electric
capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to
the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
Close the cover when not in use.
Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when plugged
into a vehicle’s power outlet. These
devices may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in
your vehicle.
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand.You may get an electric
shock.
OYD046045L
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 12V,
15A with the engine running.
4 141
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 142
Features of your vehicle
LCD monitor (clock)
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:
• HOUR (1) :
Pressing the 'H" button will advance
the time display by one hour.
OYD046323
WARNING - Clock setting
distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steering control and cause severe
personal injury or an accident.
4 142
• MINUTE (2) :
Pressing the "M" button will advance
the time display by one minute.
• Display conversion:
- Clock
To change the 12 hour format to
the 24 hour format, press the "H"
and "M" button at the same time for
more than 4 seconds.
For example, if the time is 10:15
p.m., the display will change to
22:15.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 143
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
OUN026348
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of the hanger.
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
Floor mat anchor(s)
WARNING
OPS046500
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the cloth pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
ODMECO2034
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in the front and
rear floor carpet of your vehicle. This
keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.
4 143
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 144
Features of your vehicle
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat in the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. ,all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle was manufactured with
driver's side floor mat anchors that
are designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
Kia recommends that only the Kia
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
4 144
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
OYDDCO3239
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Page 145
Features of your vehicle
Covering shelf (5 Door)
CAUTION
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the cover removed. It may
damage to the cover.
• Since the covering shelf may
be damaged or malformed, do
not apply excessive force to
the cover or do not put the
heavy loads on it.
OYDDCO3240
Use the cover to hide items stored in
the cargo area.
The covering shelf will be lifted when
the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the
strap (1) from holder if you want to
return the cover to original position. To
remove the covering shelf completely,
lift the cover to a 43-degree angle and
pull it out to the full (2). For installation
of the cover, reverse the removal procedure.
When you return the covering shelf
to its original position, hold the cover
and lower it.
The covering shelf may be lifted
when the tailgate is opened. Ensure
that the luggage on the cover is
moved to a safe place.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the covering shelf while driving. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is designed for
luggage only.
Maintain the balance of the vehicle
and locate the weight as far forward
as possible.
4 145
YDM CAN (ENG) 4a.QXP
5/12/2017
3:35 PM
Features of your vehicle
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system identifies the
present position of our vehicle by
using GPS information and can help
guide you to a selected destination.
Detailed information for the navigation system is described in a separately supplied manual.
4 146
Page 146
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
Glass antenna (if equipped)
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
OYD046053L
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a
cleaner or use a scraper to
remove foreign deposits as
this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings such as Ni, Cd, and so
on. These can disturb receiving AM and FM broadcast signals.
When the radio power switch is
turned on while the ignition switch is
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position,
your car will receive both AM and FM
broadcast signals through the antenna in the rear window glass.
4 147
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel audio controls
(if equipped)
■ Type A
OYDDMM2002
■ Type B
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Do not operate audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
OYDDMM2003
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.
4 148
VOLUME ( / ) (1)
• Press the lever upward ( ) to
increase the volume.
• Press the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 1 second or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Features of your vehicle
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio
source.
FM(1~2)➟ AM➟ SAT(1~3)➟ CD➟ USB
AUX(iPod®)➟FM...
In addition to mode change, Power
on/off can be made by pressing this
button when the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when
the audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for
more than 1 second when the
audio is on.
MUTE (4, if equipped)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Aux, USB and iPod® * port
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod® is a Registered trademark of Apple Inc.
OYD046047L
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod® port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and an
USB port to plug in an USB and also
an iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
4 149
Features of your vehicle
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
How vehicle audio works
FM reception
AM reception
¢ ¢ ¢
¢ ¢¢
¢ ¢¢
JBM002
JBM001
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.
4 150
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
Features of your vehicle
FM radio station
¢ ¢¢
JBM003
JBM004
JBM005
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains,
and obstructions. This can lead to
undesirable or unpleasant listening
conditions which might lead you to
believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from several directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 151
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
4 152
WARNING - Cell Phone
Use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created
only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
Features of your vehicle
• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
✽ NOTICE
- Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio
CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
4 153
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.
4 154
WARNING - Audio
System
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be heard
as these signs may indicate a
product malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of purchase
or service maintenance center.
Technical expertise is required to
install or disassemble the device.
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
CAUTION - LCD Monitor
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
CAUTION - Device
cleaning
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth.
• Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners,
etc.) as such materials may
damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause damage or discoloration.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
✽ NOTICE
In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.
4 155
Features of your vehicle
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
(Continued)
4 156
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not
either
512BYTE
or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal
of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (istick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important
data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products which can be
used as key chains
or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
4 157
Features of your vehicle
USING THE iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod models may not
support communication protocol
and files may not properly play.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPhone® 3GS/4
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod® classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod® can be different from the order searched in
the audio system.
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the
iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®
manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)
®
4 158
(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected
through the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
). The device can play, but it will
not be controlled by the audio
system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics
of
your
iPod®/iPhone® device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector
or
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted
completely,
communications
between iPod® and audio may
be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod® and the
audio system, the sound effects
of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod® when
adjusting the audio system’s volume, and turn off the equalizer
of the audio system when using
the equalizer of an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable
from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
may remain in accessory mode,
and may not work properly.
• Beside support 1M cable when
purchasing iPod/iPhone products,
Long Cable cannot be recognized.
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
Before Using the Bluetooth®
Handsfree
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless
technology.
What is Bluetooth® ?
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive
environments,
Bluetooth® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth® mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility,
visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/o
wners/bluetooth.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth® phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
4 159
Features of your vehicle
When connecting a Bluetooth®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth® features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden
state or the Bluetooth® power is
turned off. Disable the hidden
state or turn on the Bluetooth®
power prior to searching/connecting with the Head unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth®
feature within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
4 160
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth®
connection
may
become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth® function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the Audio System and
try again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the
model of your mobile phone.
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition performance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above
the head of the driver’s seat and
maintain a proper position when
saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.
4 161
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)
■ Type A
B0G3G0000EC
4 162
Features of your vehicle
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
• In [SETUP] button [Display], the
radio pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is
turned [On]. When the pop up
screen is displayed, use the TUNE
knob or preset buttons to select the
desired mode.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed, the
mode is changed in the order of CD
➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟
BT(Bluetooth®) Audio.
• In [SETUP] button [Display], the
media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is
turned [On]. When the pop up
screen is displayed, use the TUNE
knob or preset buttons to select the
desired mode.
(4) PHONE
• Operates Phone Screen.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) SEEK/TRACK
• Radio mode: Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- Shortly press the button: Moves
to next or previous song (file).
- Press and hold the button:
Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
• Bluetooth® Audio mode: Moves to
next or previous song(file).
- The Play/Pause feature may
operate differently depending on
the mobile phone.
(6) POWER/VOL knob
• Power knob: Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob.
• Volume knob: Sets volume by turning the knob left/right.
4 163
Features of your vehicle
(7) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Radio mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels).
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- [RPT] button: Repeat
- [RDM] button: Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
(8) DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed, sets the Screen Off ➟
Screen On ➟ Screen Off.
• Audio operation is maintained and
only the Screen will be turned Off.
• In the Screen Off state, press any
button to turn the Screen On again.
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode
- Shortly press the button:
Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each.
- Press and hold the button:
Previews the broadcasts saved
in preset [1] ~ [6] buttons for 5
seconds each.
- Press the [SCAN] button again
to continue listening to the current frequency.
- SAT Radio does not support the
preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the button:
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
- Press the [SCAN] button again
to continue listening to the current song (file).
(10) SETUP
• Moves to the Display, Sound,
Phone, System setting modes.
4 164
Features of your vehicle
(11) MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
• iPod® List: Move to parent category.
(12) CAT/FOLDER
• SiriusXM Radio: Category Search.
• MP3 CD/USB mode: Folder Search.
(13) TUNE knob
• Radio mode: Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
4 165
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using Compact
Discs
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created
only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for
audio cassettes onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not
insert more than one CD at a
time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
4 166
• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally depending
on manufacturing company or
recording methods.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders):
1. Song playing order:
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order:
❋ If no song file is contained in
the folder, that folder is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
- Audio System Safety
•
•
•
•
Warnings
Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.
Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign
objects into the device. Such
acts could lead to smoke, fire,
or product malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
WARNING - Distracted
Driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
4 167
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of purchase or service maintenance center. Technical expertise is required
to install or disassemble the
device.
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
4 168
CAUTION
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
✽ NOTICE
In case of product malfunction,
please contact your dealer or vehicle
service center.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between 8Kbps
~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not
either
512BYTE
or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode.
(e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or
the type of files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time for recognition the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music
files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
4 169
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (istick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4 170
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products
which can be used as
key chains or cellular
phone accessories as
they could cause damage to the
USB jack. Please make certain
only to use plug type connector
products.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using iPod® Device
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and
files may not play properly.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPhone® 3GS/4
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod® classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod®.
(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected
through the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio mode, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, only iPod®
mode will be supported during
Bluetooth® Audio Streaming. To
use Bluetooth® Audio Streaming,
disconnect iPod® cable with
iPhone®.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable from
iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
• Use an iPod®/iPhone® USB cable
shorter than 1 meter in length,
longer cables cannot be recognized.
4 171
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
- Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Cellular Phone
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including handsfree devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For
more information, visit the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com.
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to
use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
(Continued)
4 172
(Continued)
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Answering
and
placing
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto
Download
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
operations.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
settings (e.g. pairing a phone)
while driving.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the
hidden state or turn on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
power prior to searching/connecting with the car audio system.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in an underground location, in
a mountainous area, etc.).
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicle's interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or a malfunction to the audio
system. In this case, storing the
device in a different location may
resolve the condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC
ON),
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
to automatically connect your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone, try the following.
1) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
2) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP] button [Phone] and
[turn off] the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection may become intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
(Continued)
4 173
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired
or connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4 174
✽ NOTICE
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone allows the user
to conveniently make calls, receive
calls, and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
WARNING
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device
excessively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time while
driving is dangerous and may
lead to accidents.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any button other
than the
button terminates the
voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head
below the microphone above the
driver’s seat and maintain proper
position when speaking voice commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.
4 175
Features of your vehicle
Radio Mode
With the Radio Mode Button
Seek
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button.
• Shortly pressing the button:
Automatically searches for the next
station.
• Pressing and holding the button:
While holding the button, frequency changes without stopping.
When the button is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from that point.
4 176
Preset Seek
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons.
• Shortly pressing the button: Plays
the frequency saved in the corresponding button.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Pressing and holding the desired
button from [1] ~ [6] will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected button and sound a BEEP.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button.
• Shortly pressing the button: The
broadcast frequency increases
and previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the
current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Previews the broadcasts saved in
preset [1] ~ [6] buttons for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
MENU: Radio
Within [MENU] button is the A.Store
(Auto Store).
A.Store (Auto Store): [1] Button
Select A.Store (Auto Store) to save
frequencies with superior reception
to preset [1] ~ [6] buttons. If no frequencies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package. You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercialfree music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on a
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
4 177
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM Radio Mode
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number)/ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the
RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press
the [RADIO] button, and tune to
channel zero.
4 178
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button.
• Shortly pressing the button:
Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• Press the [SCAN] button again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
• If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Seek
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button.
• Shortly pressing the button: Select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Continuously move to previous or
next channel.
• If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button.
• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the [CAT/FOLDER] button to navigate category list.
• Press TUNE knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
• If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Features of your vehicle
Preset
Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons.
• Shortly pressing the button: Plays
the channel saved in the corresponding button.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Pressing and holding the desired
button from [1] ~ [6] will save the
current broadcast to the selected
button and sound a BEEP.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob: Changes the
channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press TUNE knob: Selects the
menu.
Menu: SiriusXM Radio
✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Press the [MENU] button.
Info (Information): [1] Button
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
4 179
Features of your vehicle
Media Mode
With the Media Mode Button
Press the [MEDIA] button to change
the mode in the order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
■ USB Mode
■ My Music Mode
■ Audio CD Mode
■ MP3 CD Mode
4 180
The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing [RPT]
button.
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen.
• To repeat one song (press the button): Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen.
• To repeat folder (press the button
twice): Repeats all files within the
current folder.
Press the [RPT] button again to turn
off repeat.
Features of your vehicle
Random
While song (file) is playing [RDM]
button.
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen.
• Random (press the button): Plays
all songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen.
• Folder Random (press the button):
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
iPod® mode: RDM on screen.
• All Random (press the button):
Plays all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB: ALL RDM on screen.
• All Random (press the button
twice): Plays all files in random
order.
Press the [RDM] button again to turn
off random.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button.
• Shortly pressing the button: Plays
the current song from the beginning.
If the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button is
pressed again within 2 seconds, the
previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing [SEEK/TRACK ∧] button.
• Shortly pressing the button: Plays
the next song.
• Pressing and holding the button:
Fast forwards the song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing [SCAN] button.
• Shortly pressing the button: Scans
all songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
• Press the [SCAN] button again to
turn off.
• The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.
Folder Search
(Only MP3 CD, USB mode)
While file is playing [CAT/
FOLDER ∧ ] button.
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing [CAT/
FOLDER ∨ ] button.
• Searches the parent folder.
If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs/Files
• Turning TUNE knob: Searches for
songs (files).
• Pressing TUNE knob: Plays selected song (file).
4 181
Features of your vehicle
MENU: Audio CD
Press the Audio CD mode [MENU]
button to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat: [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Random: [2] Button
Randomly play songs within the current CD.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information: [3] Button
Display information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
4 182
MENU: MP3 CD/USB
Press the MP3 CD/USB mode
[MENU] button to set the Repeat,
Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All
Random, Information, and Copy features.
Repeat: [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random: [2] Button
Randomly play songs within the current folder.
Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat: [3] Button
Repeat songs within the current folder.
Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random: [4] Button
Randomly play all songs within the
CD/USB.
Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information: [5] Button
Display information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
Copy: [6] Button
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
If another button is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is
displayed.
If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying
is canceled.
Music will not be played while copying is in progress.
Features of your vehicle
MENU: iPod®
In iPod® mode, press the [MENU]
button to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.
Repeat: [1] Button
Repeat the current song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random: [2] Button
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
Press RDM again to turn off.
Information: [3] Button
Displays information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
Search: [4] Button
Displays iPod® category list.
While in iPod® category sublists,
press the [MENU] button to move up
to the parent category.
MENU: AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the [MENU] button to change to AUX mode.
AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.
✽ NOTICE - Using the AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4 183
Features of your vehicle
MENU: My Music
In My Music mode, press the
[MENU] button to set the Repeat,
Random, Information, Delete, Delete
All and Delete Selection features.
Repeat: [1] Button
Repeats the currently playing song.
Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random: [2] Button
Plays all songs in random order.
Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information: [3] Button
Displays information for the current
song.
Press the [MENU] button to turn off
info display.
4 184
Delete Selection: [6] Button
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
Delete: [4] Button
Deletes currently playing file.
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list.
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the [MENU] button and
select [Delete] from the menu to
delete the selected file.
Delete All: [5] Button
Deletes all songs of My Music.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press [MENU] button and select [Delete] from the
menu.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using the My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
MENU: Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
• Play/Stop:
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
The title/artist info may not be supported in some mobile phones.
When it is not supported, no title or
artist will be displayed.
• Previous/Next song
Press [SEEK/TRACK] button to play
previous or next song.
The previous song/next song/play/
pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.
WARNING - Distracted
Driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
4 185
Features of your vehicle
Phone Mode
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) Mutes audio volume.
(2) Press the button to change audio
source.
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2
➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio
(3) Raises or lowers speaker volume.
4 186
(4) Activates voice recognition.
(5) Places and transfers calls.
• Check call history and making calls
- Shortly press the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel controls.
- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
- Press the [CALL] button again to
connect a call to the selected
number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
- Press and hold the [CALL] button on the steering wheel controls.
- The most recently called number
is redialed.
(6) Ends calls or cancels functions.
Pairing on the Steering wheel
controls
❈ If call history does not exist, a
screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The
download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)
• Vehicle Name: Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device.
• Passkey: Passkey used to pair the
device.
1. Press the [CALL] button on the
steering wheel controls.
2. Select [OK] to enter the Pair
Phone screen.
Features of your vehicle
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
❈ SSP: Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device:
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Enter the passkey “0000”
to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
SSP supported device:
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed that has the 6 digit
passkey from any nearby SSP
device that is found. Check the
passkey on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, AndroidTM
and Blackberry® phones) may offer
an option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth® connection requests
by default.
MENU: Phone
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
[PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel control displays the following
screen. Select [Pair] to pair a new
device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.
Favorites: [1] Button
Up to 20 frequently used contacts
can be saved for easy access.
Call History: [2] Button
Displays the call history list screen.
If you select the [History] but there is
no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call
history data.
4 187
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Contacts: [3] Button
Displays the Contacts list screen.
If you select the [Contacts] but there
is no contacts data stored, a prompt
is displayed which asks to download
contacts data.
Setup: [4] Button
Displays Phone related settings.
This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to
your mobile phone’s user manual.
4 188
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press [CALL] button on the steering wheel while the
call is incoming.
• Caller: Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts.
• Incoming Number: Displays the
incoming number.
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Features of your vehicle
Favorites
Press the [PHONE] button Select
[Fav].
• Saved favorite contact: Connects
call upon selection.
• To add favorite: Downloaded contacts can be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the [PHONE] button Select
[History].
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not stored
in Call History.
Contacts
Press the [PHONE] button Select
[Contacts].
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Find a contact in alphabetical order,
press the [MENU] button.
4 189
Features of your vehicle
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth® streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
4 190
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been
turned off within the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts. If
downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device settings or for notifications on the
screen.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth®
devices and function support, refer
to your phone’s user manual.
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition Mode
Using Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
button on the
steering wheel controls. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [On], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”.
• If prompt feedback is in [On] mode,
then the system will only say
“(BEEP)”.
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [SETUP] button [System] [Prompt Feedback].
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruction and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names. (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens. (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms. (“In Case of
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations. (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
button on
the steering wheel controls.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “Beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
button on the
Shortly press the
steering wheel controls.
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “Beep”, say the
voice command.
Ending Voice Recognition
While Voice Recognition is operating
button on
Press and hold the
the steering wheel controls.
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel controls or a different button will end
voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the
button on the steering
wheel to end voice command.
4 191
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation.
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts:
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names. (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens. (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms. (“In Case of
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbreviations. (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
4 192
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a command after
the beep. (BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘CD’, ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a...
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘CD’, ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Ending Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a command after
the beep. (BEEP)
Contacts
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Cancel
while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the
button:
(BEEP)
More Help
4 193
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call<Name>
Call <Name>
on Mobile
Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
within the current mode.
Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name>
in Office
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Office” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office
Call <Name>
at Home
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Home” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home
Call <Name>
on Other
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Other” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other
Phone
Provides guidance on Phone related commands.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites
4 194
Displays the Favorite screen.
Command
Function
Call History
Displays the Call History screen.
Contacts
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
command, say the name of a contact saved in the
Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
command, you can say the number that you want
to call.
Redial
Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial
Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
and Bluetooth® connections
Radio
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟
SAT3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)
Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)
Displays the FM2 screen.
AM
Displays the AM screen.
Features of your vehicle
Command
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in
FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
Command
Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Mutes the sound.
Mute
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
1~3
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media
Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD
Plays music on the CD.
USB
Plays music on the USB device.
iPod®
Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music
Plays music saved in My Music.
4 195
Features of your vehicle
FM/AM Radio Commands
Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
4 196
Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current present
and plays for 10 seconds each.
Satellite Radio Commands
Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Radio.
Command
Function
Channel 0~223
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information
Displays the information of the current broadcast.
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Commands
Commands available during Audio CD operation.
Command
Function
MP3 CD/USB Commands
Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random
Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current track.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Plays the desired track number.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information
Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder
Plays the first file in the next folder.
Track 1~30
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
4 197
Features of your vehicle
iPod® Commands
Commands available during iPod® operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays the songs within the current category.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential
order.
4 198
My Music Commands
Commands available during My Music operation.
Command
Function
Random
Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation.
Command
Play
Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pause
Pauses the current song.
4 199
Features of your vehicle
With the Sound Button
Setup Mode
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Display].
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes [On]
selection mode.
• During On state, press the [RADIO]
or [MENU] button to display the
mode change pop up screen.
4 200
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Sound].
Features of your vehicle
Tone
This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone].
• Return: While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will restore
the parent menu.
• Bass, Middle, Treble: Selects the
sound tone.
• Default: Restores default settings.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
Fader, Balance.
Select [Position].
• Return: While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
• Fader, Balance: Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default: Restores default settings.
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.].
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set [Off/On].
4 201
Features of your vehicle
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone].
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
“Pairing on the Steering wheel controls” on the previous page.
4 202
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth® Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth® audio
related features are supported.
• Bluetooth® related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth® audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of
communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices are
automatically searched and reconnected.
Features of your vehicle
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List].
1) Connected Phone: Device that is
currently connected.
2) Paired Phone: Device that is
paired but not connected.
• Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
4 203
Features of your vehicle
• Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect].
4 204
• Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The “Change Priority” feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] from the Menu. The selected
device will be changed to the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority phone.
Features of your vehicle
• Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete].
- When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
- If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
- To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
Pairing a New Device
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone].
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List].
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
4 205
Features of your vehicle
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone: Connect/
Disconnects currently selected
phone.
2) Change Priority: Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority.
3) Delete: Deletes the currently
selected phone.
4) Return: Moves to the previous
screen.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.
4 206
Downloading Contacts
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download].
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume].
Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the [SEEK/TRACK]
button.
Features of your vehicle
With the System Button
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off].
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio system.
• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
back on, go to [SETUP] button [Phone] and select “Yes”.
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[System].
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] [OK].
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
4 207
Features of your vehicle
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through TUNE knob.
• On: This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off: This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
4 208
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language].
The system will reboot after the language is changed.
• Language support by region.
English, Français, Español
Features of your vehicle
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under
license. SiriusXM services require
a subscription sold separately, or
as a package, by Sirius XM Radio
Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your
chosen payment method at thencurrent rates. Fees and taxes
apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
trademark
of
Google,
Inc.
BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
4 209
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
■ Type B
B0H3G0000EC
4 210
Features of your vehicle
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
(2) RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
(3) MEDIA
• Changes to CD/USB(iPod®)/AUX/
My Music/Bluetooth® Audio mode.
• Each time the button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order
of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio.
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) EJECT
• Ejects the disc.
(4) PHONE
• Changes to Phone mode.
• When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(6) SEEK/TRACK
• When pressed briefly
- Radio mode: Plays previous/
next frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes: Changes the track,
Song(file).
• When pressed and held
- Radio
mode: Continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes: Rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file.
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
(5) POWER/VOL knob
• Power knob: Press to turn power
on/off.
• Volume knob: Turn left/right to control volume.
4 211
Features of your vehicle
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode: Previews all receivable broadcasts for 5 seconds
each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes:
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
(10) SETUP
• Changes to Setup mode.
(7) DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
(8) MUTE
• When the button is pressed, stops
sound and “Audio Mute” is displayed on LCD.
4 212
(11) TUNE knob
• Radio mode: Turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes: Turn to search Tracks/
channels/files.
(12) CAT/FOLDER
• SiriusXM Radio: Category Search.
• MP3 CD/USB mode: Search Folder.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using Compact
Discs
• This device has been
manufactured to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to prevent
disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damage
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and
playing times may occur depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the recording
method used.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a
soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also
result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
used. If problems persist, trying
using a different CD as continued
use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CDRW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype CDs may not function in the
device. DATA discs cannot be
played. (However, such discs may
still operate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagonshaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds, the disc will automatically
be re-inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure. (e.g. copy CDR, CDs with labels)
4 213
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using the USB
Devices
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if it
is already connected when the
ignition is turned on. The USB
device may not operate properly if
the car ignition is turned on or off
with the USB device connected.
• Be careful for static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the vehicle's audio system
may not recognize the USB
depending on what firmware is
used by USB device or what files
are on the USB.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
4 214
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector and bodily parts or foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short
periods of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or
file formats stored on the USB.
Such differences in time are not
indications of malfunctions.
• The vehicle audio system only supports USB devices designed to
play music files.
• USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Doing so may lead
to worsened performance or damage to the audio system.
• The audio system may not recognize the USB device if separately
purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used.
Connect the USB device directly
with the USB port of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
on the USBs.
• The audio system may not operate
normally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
audio system.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a typical USB memory device (miniature, keychain, etc.). For best
results, use a typical USB device
that has a metal case.
• The device may not support normal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB
jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
4 215
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using an iPod®
• iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod® with
your vehicle's audio system, you
must use a dedicated iPod® cable.
(the cable that is supplied when
purchasing iPod®/iPhone® products)
• If the iPod® is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after connecting. If possible, connect the iPod® to the vehicle with the iPod® stopped/paused.
• When the vehicle ignition is set to
ACC or ON, connecting the iPod®
through the iPod® cable will
charge the iPod® through the car
audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
4 216
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod®, and
the audio system are both active,
EQ effects could overlap and
cause sound deterioration and distortion. Whenever possible, turn
off the EQ feature within the
external device when it is connected to the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod® or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used,
disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod® or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock connector or Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
• iPod® mode cannot be operated
when the iPod® cannot be recognized due to versions that do not
support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano
devices, the iPod® may not be recognized when the battery level is
low. Please charge the iPod® for
use.
• The search/play orders shown
within the iPod® device may differ
from the orders shown within the
audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to
an iPod® device defect, reset the
iPod® and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod® manual)
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Some iPod® products may not
sync with the System depending
on the version. If the Media is
removed before the Media is recognized, then the system may not
properly restore the previously
operated mode. (iPad® charging is
not supported.)
• Use an iPod® cable shorter than 1
meter in length such as the one
originally supplied with a new
iPod®, longer cables may lead to
the audio system not recognizing
the iPod®.
✽ NOTICE
- Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
• If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Phone is being used to play music
and receives an incoming or outgoing phone call, then the music
will stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises with some
mobile phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or
making an outgoing call while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio may result in
audio interference.
4 217
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
- Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Cellular Phone
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including handsfree devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For
more information, visit the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com.
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Kia
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners. A
Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
(Continued)
4 218
(Continued)
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Answering
and
placing
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call
(Switch to Private, Switch to call
waiting, Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
operations.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
has been deactivated. Disable the
hidden state or activate the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
prior to searching/connecting with
the car audio system.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area. (e.g. in a tunnel, in an underground area, in a
mountainous area, etc.)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to the audio
system. In this case, storing the
device in a different location may
resolve the condition.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC
ON),
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
to automatically connect your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone, try the following.
1) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your
mobile phone.
2) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature in
your car audio system, go to
[SETUP] button [Phone] and
[turn off] the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection may become intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try
again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
(Continued)
4 219
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired
or connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4 220
✽ NOTICE
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that enables
drivers to practice safe driving.
Connecting the car audio system
with a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone allows the user
to conveniently make calls, receive
calls, and manage the phone book.
Before using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
WARNING
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device
excessively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time while
driving is dangerous and may
lead to accidents.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Using Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any button other
than the
button will terminate
the voice recognition mode.
• For optimal voice recognition performance, position your head
below the microphone above the
driver’s seat and maintain proper
position when speaking voice commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation..
4 221
Features of your vehicle
Radio Mode
Radio Mode Display Controls
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
(5) A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
4 222
With the Radio Mode Button
Pressing the [RADIO] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] button [Display], then
pressing the [RADIO] button will display the Radio Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Features of your vehicle
A.Store(Auto Store)
Press the [A.Store] to automatically
save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
Seek
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] to display the
broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] to play the desired
preset.
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the [1] ~ [6] to save the
current frequency to the selected
preset.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to preview
frequencies with superior reception
for 5 seconds each.
Press and hold the [SCAN] button to
preview presets for 5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored. While
Scan is operating, pressing the
[SCAN] button will cancel scanning.
4 223
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package.You’ll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music,
plus all your favorite sports, exclusive
talk, entertainment, and a selection of
premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM
channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite
radio antenna located on the roof of
your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides
the best location for an unobstructed,
open view of the sky, a requirement of
a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM,
there are several factors that can affect
satellite radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
4 224
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on a
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous states, DC and
Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service
is also available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM Radio Mode
(1) Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
Radio Mode Display Controls
(2) Channel Information
Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title
information.
(3) Preset
Displays current playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
(5) Info
Displays detailed information about
the current broadcast.
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification Number)
/ESN (Electronic Serial Number) ready.To
retrieve the RID/ESN, turn on the radio,
press the [RADIO] button, and tune to
channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
4 225
Features of your vehicle
Seek
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the [SCAN]
button again will cancel the scan
operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.
4 226
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
[CAT/FOLDER] button and press the
TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the [Preset] to display the
broadcast information for the channel saved to each button.
Press the [1] ~ [6] to play the desired
preset.
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold
one of the [1] ~ [6] to save the current
channel to the selected preset.
Features of your vehicle
Media Mode
Mode Display on the Status Bar
Media Mode Screen
When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
iPod®, USB, or AUX device is connected or a CD is inserted, the corresponding mode icon will be displayed.
Icon
Pressing the [MEDIA] button will
change the operating mode in the
order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟
My Music ➟ BT Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] button [Display], then
pressing the [MEDIA] button will display the Media Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
USB(iPod®)
AUX
4 227
Features of your vehicle
MENU: Audio CD
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
Audio CD Mode Display Controls
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the current track.
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
4 228
Features of your vehicle
With the Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] to pause
and press [] to play.
Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track information is included within the audio
CD.
Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current track.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start playing.
Changing Tracks
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next track.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button after the track has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
track from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button before the track has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
track.
4 229
Features of your vehicle
MENU: MP3 CD
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
MP3 CD Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays
the currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
4 230
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Features of your vehicle
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder: Plays all files within
the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All: Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] to pause
and press [] to play.
If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
4 231
Features of your vehicle
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
4 232
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
Features of your vehicle
MENU: USB
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
USB Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option is set as the default display, the
folder name/file name are displayed
as detailed file information.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
4 233
Features of your vehicle
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder: Plays the files in the
current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All: Plays all files in shuffle
order.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Repeat➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current folder.
4 234
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
With the USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the [II] to pause
and press [] to play.
Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and may result in
faulty list display or file search.
Normal operations will resume once
loading is complete.
The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
Features of your vehicle
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Searching Folders
Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
4 235
Features of your vehicle
MENU: iPod®
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
iPod® Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the currently operating function.
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total number of songs.
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the current song.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
4 236
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of
Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle All: Plays all songs in shuffle
order.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current song
(9) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
Features of your vehicle
With the iPod® Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod® song.
While playing, press the [II] to pause
and press [] to play.
iPod® products with unsupported
communication protocols may not
properly operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next song.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button after the song has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button before the song has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
song.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod® product.
Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current song.
Category Menu
(1) Displays the play screen.
(2) Moves to the iPod® root category
screen.
(3) Moves to the previous category.
If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod® device.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
4 237
Features of your vehicle
MENU: AUX
AUX Mode Display Controls
Press the [MEDIA] button Select
[AUX].
An external device can be connected
to play music.
4 238
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will be
restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder,
car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
Features of your vehicle
MENU: My Music
(1) Mode
Displays current operating mode.
My Music Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file.
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time.
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(8) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file.
(11) List
Moves to the list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
4 239
Features of your vehicle
With the My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the [II] to pause
and press [] to play.
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] will be disabled.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
Pressing the [SEEK/TRACK ∨] button before the file has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
List Menu
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Selects all files.
(3) Unselects all selected files.
(4) Deletes selected files.
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the [Delete] to delete
the selected files.
If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved. Identical
files cannot be copied more than
1,000 times.
To check memory information, go to
[SETUP] button [System] [Memory Information]
Rewinding/Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
4 240
Features of your vehicle
MENU: Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will
automatically start.
While playing, press the [II] to
pause and press [II] to play.
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the [SETUP] button [Phone] to display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
4 241
Features of your vehicle
Phone Mode
Making a call using the Steering
wheel controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) Mutes audio volume.
(2) Each time this button is pressed,
the mode is changed in the order of
FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2
➟ SAT3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.
(3) Used to control volume.
4 242
(4) When pressed shortly
- Radio mode: Searches broadcast frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music/
BT Audio) modes: Changes the
track, file or chapter.
When pressed and held
- Radio mode, automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song(file).
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(5) When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition.
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command waiting state.
When pressed and held
- Ends voice recognition.
(6) When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen.
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call.
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call.
- When pressed during call waiting, switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting).
When pressed and held
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call.
- When pressed during a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone. (Private)
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree. (Operates
only when Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree is connected)
(7) Ends phone call.
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
When No Devices have been
Paired
➀ Press the [PHONE] button or the
[CALL] button on the steering
wheel controls. The following
screen is displayed.
➁ Press the [OK] to enter the Pair
Phone screen.
• Vehicle Name: Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device.
• Passkey: Passkey used to pair the
device.
➂ From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
SSP supported device:
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
➄ Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.
❈ SSP: Secure Simple Pairing
Non SSP supported device:
➃ After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
4 243
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel control displays the following screen. Press the
[Pair] to pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
4 244
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone].
Pair Phone
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section “When
No Devices have been Paired” on the
previous page.
Paired Phone List
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone List].
• Connected Phone: Device that is
currently connected.
• Paired Phone: Device that is paired
but not connected.
Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1).
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Disconnecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the [Disconnect](2).
• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed
with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Changing Priority
It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices with the
car audio system. The “Change
Priority” feature is used to set the
connection priority of paired phones.
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
[Change priority](4) from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3).
4 245
Features of your vehicle
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
[PHONE] button to display the
Phone menu screen.
• Favorites: Up to 20 frequently used
contacts can be saved for easy
access.
• Call History: Displays the call history list screen.
• Contacts: Displays the Contacts
list screen.
• Dial Number: Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls.
• Setup: Displays Phone related settings.
4 246
✽ NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] but
there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] but there
is no contact data stored, a prompt is
displayed which asks to download
contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer
to your mobile phone user’s manual.
Favorites
• Saved favorite contact: Connects
call upon selection.
• To add favorite: Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
• Delete All: Deletes all stored
favorite contacts.
✽ NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.
Features of your vehicle
Call History
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] to download
the call history.
• Call History:
- Displays recent calls. (call history)
- Connects call upon selection.
• Download: Download Recent Call
History.
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the [Download] to
download the call history.
• Contacts List:
- Displays downloaded contact
entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Sort by: Find a contact in alphabetical order.
• Download: Download contact entries.
4 247
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be
edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device has been disconnected. (However, the contacts and
call history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth® streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the status bar.
(Continued)
4 248
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device. In addition, some
devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download
contacts. If downloading does not
normally occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device settings
or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth® devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
• Dial Pad: Used to enter phone
number.
• Call: If a number has been entered,
calls the number. If no number has
been entered, switches to call history screen.
• End: Deletes the entered phone
number.
• Delete: Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only the
call volume will operate.
•The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
• Caller: Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts.
• Incoming Number: Displays the
incoming number.
• Accept: Accepts the incoming call.
• Reject: Rejects the incoming call.
During a Handsfree Call
• Caller: Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts.
• Incoming Number: Displays the
incoming number.
• Call time: Displays the call time.
• End: Ends call.
• Private: Converts to Private mode.
• Out Vol.: Sets call volume as heard
by the other party.
• Mute: Turns Mic Mute On/Off.
✽ NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4 249
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition Mode
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
button on the
steering wheel controls. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”.
• If prompt feedback is in [ON]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”.
• To change Prompt Feedback
[ON]/[OFF], go to [SETUP] button
[System] [Prompt Feedback].
For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
4 250
✽ NOTICE
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries.
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim” etc.)
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names)
for all contacts. (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”)
2) Do not use abbreviations. (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”)
3) Do not use acronyms. (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”)
4) Do not use special characters.
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk*”, “ampersand &”)
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name. (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”)
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
button on
the steering wheel controls.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “Beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
button on the
steering wheel controls.
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “Beep”, say the
voice command.
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a command after
the beep. (BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘CD’, ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a...
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
You can also say a media source like ‘CD’, ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Ending Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
button:
Please say a command after
the beep. (BEEP)
Contacts
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Cancel
while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the
button:
(BEEP)
More Help
4 251
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call <Name>
Call <Name>
on Mobile
Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be used
within the current mode.
Calls <Name> saved in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name>
in Office
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Office” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office
Call <Name>
at Home
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Home” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home
Call <Name>
on Other
Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Other” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other
Phone
Provides guidance on Phone related commands.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites
4 252
Displays the Favorite screen.
Command
Function
Call History
Displays the Call History screen.
Contacts
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
command, say the name of a contact saved in the
Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
command, you can say the number that you want
to call.
Redial
Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial
Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
and Bluetooth® connections
Radio
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟
SAT3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)
Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)
Displays the FM2 screen.
AM
Displays the AM screen.
Features of your vehicle
Command
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in
FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
Command
Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Mutes the sound.
Mute
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
1~3
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media
Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD
Plays music on the CD.
USB
Plays music on the USB device.
iPod®
Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music
Plays music saved in My Music.
4 253
Features of your vehicle
FM/AM Radio Commands
Commands available during FM/AM Radio operation.
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
4 254
Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current present
and plays for 10 seconds each.
Satellite Radio Commands
Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Radio.
Command
Function
Channel 0~223
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information
Displays the information of the current broadcast.
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Commands
Commands available during Audio CD operation.
Command
Function
MP3 CD/USB Commands
Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Command
Function
Shuffle
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle
Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Shuffle Off
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Shuffle Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current track.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential
order.
Plays the desired track number.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information
Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder
Plays the first file in the next folder.
Track 1~30
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
4 255
Features of your vehicle
iPod® Commands
Commands available during iPod® operation.
Command
Function
Shuffle
Randomly plays the songs within the current category.
Shuffle Off
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential
order.
4 256
My Music Commands
Commands available during My Music operation.
Command
Function
Shuffle
Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat
Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation.
Command
Play
Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pause
Pauses the current song.
4 257
Features of your vehicle
Setup Mode
Press the [SETUP] button to display
the Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Phone]
and [System].
4 258
With the Display Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Display].
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Mode Pop
up] and [Media Display].
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [Left/Right] to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day or Night mode.
Press the [Default] to reset.
• Automatic: Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day: Always maintains the brightness on high.
• Night: Always maintains the brightness on low.
Mode Pop up
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
button will display the Mode Pop up
screen.
✽ NOTICE
The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
Features of your vehicle
With the Sound Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Sound].
You can select and control options
related to [Sound Setting], [Speed
Dependent Vol.], [Voice Recognition
Vol.] and [Touch Screen Beep].
Media Display
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File: Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song: Displays album
name/artist name/song name.
Sound Setting
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the [Left/Right] to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] to reset.
4 259
Features of your vehicle
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
4 260
Voice Recognition Volume
Use on screen [-], [+] to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Features of your vehicle
With the Phone Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone].
You can select and control options
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Contacts Download],
[Outgoing Volume] and [Bluetooth
System Off].
Pairing a New Device
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone: Connect/
Disconnects currently selected
phone.
(3) Delete: Deletes the currently
selected phone.
(4) Change priority: Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority.
4 261
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Before
Downloading
Contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.
4 262
Downloading Contacts
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.
Outgoing Volume
Use the [-], [+] to adjust the outgoing
volume level.
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the [SEEK/TRACK]
button.
Features of your vehicle
With the System Button
Press the [SETUP] button Select
[System].
You can select and control options
related to [Memory Information],
[Prompt Feedback] and [Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
• Using: Displays capacity currently
in use
• Capacity: Displays total capacity
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio system.
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to [SETUP]
button [Phone] and press “Yes”.
4 263
Features of your vehicle
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
• ON: When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts.
• OFF: When using voice recognition,
omits some guidance prompts.
4 264
Language
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition language.
If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected language.
Features of your vehicle
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under
license. SiriusXM services require
a subscription sold separately, or
as a package, by Sirius XM Radio
Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your
chosen payment method at thencurrent rates. Fees and taxes
apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
trademark
of
Google,
Inc.
BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
4 265
Features of your vehicle
Declaration of Conformity
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
4 266
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-8
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)/
Forward collision warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• AEB warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 5-49
• Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in
front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine with an ignition key . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Starting the engine with a smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Manual Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Dual clutch transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• To set cruise control speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
• To increase cruise control set speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• To decrease the cruising speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . 5-60
• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• DRIVE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• LKAS operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• LKAS malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• LKAS function change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-89
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . 5-89
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-90
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open
trunk/tailgate
Do not drive with the trunk/tailgate open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can
enter the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the
trunk/tailgate open proceed as
follows:
1.Close all windows.
2.Open side vents.
3.Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
5 3
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.
5 4
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any hand held devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the driver should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
- Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Loose object
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause a fire.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driving drunk.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Ignition switch position
LOCK
OYDDDR3001
OYDDDR3002
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. (If equipped)
The ignition key can be removed only
in the LOCK position. When turning
the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC
position and turn the key toward the
LOCK position.
5 6
The anti-theft steering column lock is
not a substitute for the parking brake.
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
engaged in 1st gear for the manual
transaxle or P (Park) for the automatic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Driving your vehicle
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked (If
equipped) and electrical accessories
are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the
tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
5 7
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
White
OYDDDR3005
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
5 8
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by
pressing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
(if smart key equipped).
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Yellow
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and
electrical accessories are operational.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.
START/RUN
Green
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
Not illuminated
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Nuetral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP
button
without
depressing the brake pedal, the
engine will not start and the button
will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
5 9
Driving your vehicle
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will
discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
5 10
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
Starting the engine with an
ignition key (if equipped)
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal and brake pedal
depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine with a
smart key (if equipped)
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
5.In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days,
let the engine warm up without
depressing the accelerator.
5 12
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without depressing the accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, but is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehiKEY
cle,the “ OUT
” indicator will
” or “
blink or the warning "Key not in
vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD
display. And if all doors are closed,
the chime will sound for 5 seconds.
The indicator or warning will turn
off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.
The engine will start only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE START/
STOP button while the smart
key is in the vehicle may result
in unintended engine activation
and/or unintended vehicle
movement.
Driving your vehicle
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OYDDDR3006
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can not start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If it is not possible, you can
start the engine by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button for
10 seconds while it is in the ACC
position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal.
But for your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The shift lever can be moved withoutpressing the button.
The button (1) should be pressed when
moving the shift lever into reverse.
OYDDDR2101
5 14
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
Depress the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
ignition lock switch, the engine will
not start when starting the engine
without depressing the clutch pedal.
The shift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting
into R (Reverse). The button (1)
located below the shift knob must be
pulled upward while moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION - Downshifting
Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
when the engine is running at
high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may
damage the engine, clutch and
the transaxle.
• During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transaxle lubricant is warmed up. This is normal
and not harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R
(Reverse), leave the shift lever at
neutral position and release the
clutch. Depress the clutch pedal
and then shift into 1st or R
(Reverse) gear position.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Premature
wear
Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
CAUTION - Preventing
clutch damage
• Depress the clutch pedal as
far as possible. Be aware not
to apply the pedal again
before it returns to the normal
position. If the pedal is repeatedly depressed before returning to its normal position, the
clutch system might be damaged.
• Do not overload the vehicle.
Starting or driving a vehicle in
this situation generates too
much frictional heat to the
clutch disk which might cause
damage to the clutch cover
and disk.
WARNING - Using the
clutch
When starting the vehicle or
driving backwards, releasing
the clutch pedal too soon after
shifting the lever might turn off
the engine and lead to an accident.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be depressed all
the way to the floor before shifting,
then released slowly. The clutch
pedal should always be fully
released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while
driving. This can cause unnecessary
wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an
incline. This causes unnecessary
wear. Use the foot brake or parking
brake to hold the vehicle on an
incline. Do not operate the clutch
pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
5 15
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Using the
clutch
• Depress the clutch pedal as far
as possible. Be aware not to
apply the pedal again before it
returns to the normal position.
If the pedal is repeatedly
depressed before returning to
its normal position, the clutch
system might be damaged.
• Do not overload the vehicle.
Starting or driving a vehicle in
this situation generates too
much frictional heat to the
clutch disk which might cause
damage to the clutch cover
and disk.
• When starting the vehicle or
driving backwards, releasing
the clutch pedal too soon
after shifting the lever might
turn off the engine and lead to
an accident.
5 16
Refrain from launching in 2nd gear.
Launching a vehicle in 2nd gear generates too much frictional heat to the
clutch disc which might cause damage to the clutch cover and disc.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you need to
increase your speed again. When the
vehicle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, shift to a
lower gear. When you do this,
engine braking will help slow down
the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse). The transaxle can
be damaged if you do not.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted
occupant.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING - Vehicle
handling
Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning. High speed
cornering and turning increases the risk of vehicle rollover
due to loss of vehicle control.
Rollover accidents are extremely violent and unpredictable.
5 17
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
Shift lever
Button
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
+ (UP)
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
Press the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OYD056058L
5 18
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
WARNING - Automatic
Transaxle
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is engaged in P (Park), set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement may
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on. The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
When stopped on an upgrade, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the Vehicle” explained in this
section.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
5 19
Driving your vehicle
- Parking in N (Neutral) gear
Follow below steps when parking
and you want the vehicle to move
when pushed.
1.After parking your vehicle, step on
the brake pedal and move the shift
lever to [P] with the ignition button in
[ON] or while the engine is running.
2.If the parking brake is applied
unlock the parking brake.
3.While pressing the brake pedal,
turn the ignition button [OFF].
- For smart key equipped vehicles,
the ignition switch can be moved
to [OFF] only when the shift lever
is in [P].
4.Change the gear shift lever to [N]
(Neutral) while pressing the brake
pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] button or inserting,
pressing down a tool (e.g. flathead
screw-driver) into the [SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE] access hole at the same
time. Then, the vehicle will move
when external force is applied.
5 20
WARNING
• With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park
the vehicle in [P] (Park) for
safety and engage the parking
brake.
• Before parking in N (Neutral)
gear, first make sure the parking ground is level and flat. Do
not park in [N] gear on any
slopes or gradients.
If parked and left in [N], the
vehicle may move and cause
serious damage and injury.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower
gear.
Driving your vehicle
+ (UP)
manual
mode
+ ( D OW N )
OYD056057
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, manual mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
manual mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
5 21
Driving your vehicle
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
OYDDDR2111
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D position or
the sport mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter can operate when
the vehicle speed is more than 6.2
mph.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2
mph, if you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 7 seconds or if
you shift the shift lever from D to
sports mode and shift it from sports
mode to D again, the system change
from manual mode to automatic
mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift the gear.
5 22
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
out of P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal condition.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Good driving practices
OYD056060L
Shift-lock override
(with smart key system)
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into the R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2. Insert screwdriver into the access
hold and press down on the
screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (IF EQUIPPED)
Dual clutch transmission operation
The dual clutch transmission has
seven forward speeds and one
reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) position.
+ (UP)
- ( D OW N )
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can freely operate.
❈ To move the shift lever from/to P (Parking) or between R (Reverse) and D (Drive), you must
depress the brake pedal for the vehicle to stand still.
OYD056058N
5 24
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these preNOTICEs are not
followed.
• Do not use the engine braking
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transmission, do not try to
accelerate in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• When stopped on slope, do
not hold the vehicle with
accelerator pedal. Use the
service brake or the parking
brake.
• The Dual Clutch Transmission
gives the driving feel of a manual
transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmission. Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
be felt (and heard) on the dual
clutch transmission
- Think of it as an automatically
shifting manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a conventional automatic transmission.
• Dual clutch transmission adopts
dry-type dual clutch, which is different from torque converter of
automatic
transmission,
and
shows better acceleration performance during driving. But, initial
launch might be little bit slower
than Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque and provides a direct driving feeling which may feel different
from a conventional automatic
transmission with a torque converter. This may be more noticeable
when starting from a stop or low
vehicle speed.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
• When rapidly accelerating at low
vehicle speed, engine could rev at
high rpm depending on vehicle
drive condition.
• For smooth launch uphill, press
down the accelerator pedal
smoothly depending on the current
conditions.
• If you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal at low vehicle
speed, you may feel strong engine
brake, which is similar to manual
transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may
use Manual Mode and press the
paddle shifters to downshift to a
lower gear in order to control your
speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test. This is a normal sound for the
Dual Clutch Transmission.
5 26
✽ NOTICE
■ Type B
■ Type C
If your transmission should fail,
your gear shift lever may not move
from and position indicator (D,R,N,
etc.) will blink on the cluster. If this
occurs, have the system checked by
an authorized Kia dealership.
OYD056031L/OYD056032L
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use the
foot brake or the parking brake. If
the vehicle is held by applying the
accelerator pedal on a hill the
clutch and transmission will be
overheated resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display.
• If the clutch becomes overheated
by excessive use of the clutch to
hold on a hill, you may notice a
shudder feeling and a blinking display on the instrument cluster.
When this occurs, the clutch is disabled until the clutch cools to normal temperatures. If this occurs,
pull over to a safe location, shift
into P (Park) and apply the foot
brake for a few minutes.
Driving your vehicle
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink, for
your safety, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
■ Type B
■ Type B
■ Type C
OYD056029L/OYD056030L
■ Type C
OYD056027L/OYD056028L
• Under certain conditions such as
repeated launch on steep grades,
the clutch in the transmission could
overheat. When the clutch is overheated, the safe protection mode
engages.
If the safe protection mode
engages, the gear position indicator on the cluster blinks with a
chime sound.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display and
driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the driving condition may become worse.
To return the normal driving condition, stop the vehicle and apply the
foot brake for a few minutes before
driving off.
• Gear shifts may be more noticeable than a conventional automatic
transmission. This is a normal
characteristic of this type of dual
clutch transmission.
• Repetitive kick downs may lead to
overheating of the transmission.
This will lead to change in the vehicle speed shift pattern, and illuminate some warning message.
To return the normal driving condition, refrain from kick down speed
changes. When the warning message illuminates, park the vehicle
at a safe location.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
• During the first 1,000 miles (1,500
km), you may feel that the vehicle
may not be smooth when accelerating at low speed. During this
break-in period, the shift quality
and performance of your new vehicle is continuously optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
CAUTION - Holding the
Vehicle Using Accelerator
Pedal
Do not attempt to hold your
vehicle on a hill by applying the
accelerator pedal. This can
cause your clutch and transmission to be damaged as a result
of overheating.
5 28
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking
brake.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
Driving your vehicle
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator further and the
transaxle will automatically downshift
to the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode. (if
equipped)
For more information, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
later in this chapter.
+ (UP)
WARNING
• Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal. Shifting into gear
when the engine is running at
high speed can cause the
vehicle to move very rapidly.
You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit people or
objects.
• Do not drive with the shift
lever in N (Neutral).
The engine brake will not
work and lead to an accident.
✽ NOTICE
Always ensure vehicle is stationary,
at a complete stop, before selecting
D (Drive).
- ( D OW N )
M a nu a l
mode
OYD056057
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In Manual Mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to select the desired range
of gears for the current driving conditions.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
• Only the seven forward gears can
be selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down.
When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is
automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to +
(Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is
outside of the allowable engine rpm
range. The driver must execute
upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine rpms below the red zone.
5 30
OYDDDR2111
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position or the manual mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
10km/h.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower
than 10km/h, if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you shift the shift lever
from D (Drive) to manual mode and
shift it from manual mode to D
(Drive) again, the system changes
from manual mode to automatic
mode.
With the shift lever in the manual
mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
✽ NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you cannot
shift the gear.
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Dual clutch transmission has a shift lock system which
prevents shifting the transaxle from P
(Park) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise & vibration near the shift
lever may be heard. This is a normal
condition.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the car.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
override access hole then install
the cap.
7. Have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OYD056060L
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
When you are in the vehicle with
the engine running, be careful
not to depress the accelerator
pedal for a long period of time.
The engine or exhaust system
may overheat and start a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves.They may
ignite and cause a fire.
5 32
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help slow
the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the car
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Kia recommends you follow all
posted speed limits.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.
Kickdown Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission will shift
to a lower gear depending on the
engine speed.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Depress the accelerator
gradually while releasing the service
brakes.
5 33
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
CAUTION - Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
5 34
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emergency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
OYD056037L
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on
a gradient, the shift lever should be
positioned in the appropriate low
gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
5 35
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Parking brake
Releasing the parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
OYD056038L
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking
brake
lever
slightly.
Secondly, press the release button
(1) and lower the parking brake lever
(2) while holding the button.
5 36
WARNING - Parking brake
use
• Never allow a passenger to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, stop driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
W-75
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will illuminate when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is necessary.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehicle.
5 37
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
5 38
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
W-78
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through selfdiagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS but your regular brakes will
work normally. Contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
• When you drive on a road with
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operated your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
is normal. Otherwise, you may
have a problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
✽ NOTICE
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.
OYDDDR2107
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
✽ NOTICE
For maximum protection, always
wear your seat belt. No system, no
matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.
5 40
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate
for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned
on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions
per minute) to increase.
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control
function does not operate. It
means the traction control
function does not operate.
Brake control function only
operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime
will sound. At this state, the
engine control function and
brake control function do not
operate. It means the car stability control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING - Electronic stability control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining control under certain circumstances.
5 42
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while
ESC is operating, the vehicle
may go out of control.
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
function. The main intent is to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards while driving uphill on an
inclined surface. HAC holds the braking pressure builtup by driver during
stopping procedure for 2 seconds
after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as
soon as the system detects the driver’s intention to drive off.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped on
an incline. While stopped, make
sure you maintain brake pressure sufficient to prevent your
vehicle from rolling backward
and causing an accident. Don’t
release the brake pedal until you
are ready to accelerate forward.
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESP is off but it does not activate when the ESP has malfunctioned.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detected changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates nothing unusual.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank roads such as gradient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument
cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9
mph) on curves.
5 44
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
inclement weather and on a slippery road.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Tire/Wheel
size
When replacing tires and
wheels, make sure they are the
same size as the original tires
and wheels installed. Driving
with varying tire or wheel sizes
may affect the vehicle's handling.
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
5 46
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)/ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
(IF EQUIPPED)
The AEB system is to reduce or to ✽ NOTICE
System setting and activation
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the
distance from the vehicle ahead or
the pedestrian through the sensors
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if necessary, warns the driver of accident
risk with the warning message or the
warning alarms.
WARNING
- Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Limitations
The AEB system is a supplemental system and is not a substitute for safe driving practices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehicle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
Take the following precautions when
using the Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to,
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sensors
are limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or
while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. AEB does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'Assist
Braking System'. The AEB deactivates, when the driver cancels the
system setting.
5 47
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illuminates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. When the warning
light remains ON with the AEB activated, we recommend you to have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User
Settings in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning
include the following:
5 48
• EARLY - When this condition is
selected,
the
initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward
Collision
Warning is activated normally. This setting allows
for a nominal amount of
distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial
warning occurs.
• LATE - When this condition is
selected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This
setting reduces the amount
of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning
occurs.
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB will activate activated when
the AEB is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- The driving speed is over 6 mph.
(The AEB only works within a certain range of vehicle speeds)
- When the AEB recognizes a vehicle or the pedestrian in front. (The
AEB may not recognize every
obstacle or provide warnings and
braking in every situation, so do
not rely on the AEB to stop the
vehicle in instances where the driver sees an obstacle and has the
ability to apply the brakes)
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Set or cancel AEB with controlling switches on steering wheel
after stopping the vehicle in the
safe place for your safety.
• The AEB automatically activates
when you turn the vehicle on.
The driver can deactivate the AEB
by canceling the in the system setting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates
when canceling the ESC. When the
ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot
be activated on the LCD display.
AEB warning message and
system control
Forward Warning (1st warning)
The AEB produces warning messages, warning alarms, and emergency braking based on the level of
risk of a frontal collision, such as
when a vehicle ahead suddenly
brakes, when there is no following distance from the vehicle in front, or
when it detects a collision with a
pedestrian is imminent.
OYDM056090
The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
5 49
Driving your vehicle
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
OYDM056091
OYDM056092
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB applies the brakes within
certain limit to reduce the impact
from a collision.
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display with the warning
alarms.
• The AEB controls the brakes within certain limit to release shock
from the collision.
The AEB controls the maximum
brakes just before the collision.
5 50
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the driver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly turns
the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.
The driver should always exercise
caution when operating the vehicle,
even though there is no warning
message or warning alarm.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
The AEB cannot avoid all collisions. The AEB might not completely stop the vehicle before
collision, due to ambient weather and road conditions. The
driver has the responsibility to
drive safely and control the
vehicle.
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front
(front radar)
✽ NOTICE
The AEB operates in accordance
with the risk levels, such as the distance from the vehicle/passer-by in
front, the speed of the vehicle/passer-by in front, and the driver's vehicle operation.
Warning message and warning
light
When the sensor is covered or the
sensor lens is dirty with foreign substances, such as snow or rain, the
AEB operation may temporarily stop.
In this case, a warning message
(“Autonomous Emergency Braking
disabled temporarily”) will appear to
notify the driver.
This is not a malfunction with the
AEB. To operate the AEB again,
remove the foreign substances.
OYDM046400
The sensor is to maintain a certain
distance from the vehicle in front.
However, the smudged sensor lens
with foreign substances, such as
snow and rain, adversely affects the
sensing performance. It may even
temporarily cancel the AEB. Always
keep the sensor lens clean.
5 51
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
System malfunction
• Do not install any accessories, such
as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to
external force, the system may not
operate correctly even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, we recommend you to have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not arbitrarily apply
paint on the sensor cover.
• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light (
) will
illuminate and the warning message (“Check AEB system”) will
appear for a few seconds. After the
message disappears, the master
warning light (
) will illuminate. In
this case, we recommend you to
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
5 52
WARNING
The AEB is only a supplemental
system for the driver’s convenience.
The driver still maintains
responsibility to control the
vehicle. Do not solely depend
on the AEB system. Rather,
maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
lower the driving speed.
Driving your vehicle
• The AEB may unnecessarily produce warning messages and warning alarms. Due to the sensing limitation, the AEB may not produce
warning messages or warning
alarm at all.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB, the braking control does
not operate upon detecting a collision risk even with other braking
systems normally operating.
• The AEB operates only for the
vehicle / pedestrian in front, while
driving forward. It does not operate
for any animals or vehicles in the
opposite direction.
• The AEB can not recognize crosstraffic or parked vehicles presenting a side-profile.
Limitation of the system
The AEB is an assistant system for a
driver in a certain risky driving condition and it does not take every
responsibility for all risks from driving
condition.
The AEB monitors the driving situations through the radar and the camera sensor. For any vehicle activity
occurring outside the sensor range,
the AEB may not function. The driver
should exercise caution in the following situations, as the AEB operation
may be limited:
Recognizing vehicles
- The radar or the camera is contaminated with foreign substances.
- It heavily rains or snows.
- There is electromagnetic interference.
- Something in the path of travel
deflects the radar waves.
- The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)
- The driver’s view is degraded by
driving towards sunlight, reflected
light, or darkness.
- The camera cannot see the full
profile of the vehicle in front.
- The vehicle in front is a special
vehicle, such as a heavily-loaded
truck or a trailer.
5 53
Driving your vehicle
The vehicle in front does not turn
ON the rear lights, does not have
rear lights, has asymmetric rear
lights, or has rear lights out of angle.
- The outside brightness is greatly
changed, such as entering/exiting
the tunnel.
- The vehicle driving is unstable.
- The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited.
5 54
OJF055025
OJF055026
- Driving on a curve
The AEB performance decreases
while driving on a curve. The AEB
may not recognize the vehicle in front
even in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.
While driving on a curve, exercise
caution, and, if necessary, depress
the brake pedal.
While driving on a curve, the AEB
may recognize the vehicle in front in
the next lane. Exercise caution, and, if
necessary, depress the brake pedal.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to
maintain the driving speed. Always,
take a look around the vehicle for
your safety.
Driving your vehicle
OJF055027
OJF055028
OJF055029
- Driving on a slope
The AEB performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle
in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
- Changing lanes
Even though the vehicle in the next
lane enters into your lane, it may not
be recognized by the AEB, until it
enters the AEB sensing range.
Especially when the vehicle in the
next lane abruptly enters into your
lane, it is more likely not be recognized. Always be attentive to driving
conditions.
When the stopped vehicle in front
gets out of the lane, it may not be
recognized by your AEB. Always be
attentive to driving conditions.
5 55
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing pedestrians
OJF055030
- Recognizing the vehicle
When the vehicle in front has heavy
loading extended rearward, or when
the vehicle in front has higher ground
clearance, it may induce a hazardous situation.
5 56
- The pedestrian is not fully captured
by the camera sensor, or the
pedestrian does not walk in the
upright position.
- The pedestrian moves very fast.
- The pedestrian abruptly appears in
front.
- The pedestrian wears clothes similar in color to the background.
- Conditions outside are too bright or
too dark.
- The vehicle drives at night or in the
darkness.
- There is an item similar in shape a
person’s body structure.
- The pedestrian is small.
- The pedestrian has impaired
mobility.
- The pedestrian blends in with their
surroundings.
- Sensor recognition is limited by
rain, snow, fog, etc.
- There is a group of pedestrians.
WARNING - Testing the
AEB
The AEB does not operate in
certain situations. Thus, never
test-operate the AEB against a
person or an object. It may
cause a severe injury or even
death.
WARNING - AEB and
Towing
Cancel the AEB in the User
Settings on the LCD display,
before towing another vehicle.
While towing, the brake application may adversely affect your
vehicle safety.
✽ NOTICE
The system may temporarily cancel
due to the strong electric waves.
Driving your vehicle
• Pay great caution to the vehicle in
front, when it has heavy loading
extended rearward, or when it has
higher ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects pedestrian, not carts, bicycles, motorcycles, luggage bags, or strollers.
5 57
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cruise control system allows you ✽ NOTICE
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
5 58
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condition.
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.
Cruise control switch
OYDDDR3027
CRUISE : Turns cruise control system on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
✽ NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
OYDDDR3023
OYDEDR3022
1.Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
5 59
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
To decrease the cruising
speed:
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
OYDDDR3024
OYDDDR3023
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
2 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 2 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
5 60
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40
km/h (25 mph):
OYDDDR3025
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal with a
manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 15
km/h (9 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
OYDDDR3024
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
5 61
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
OYDDDR3022
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
5 62
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
DRIVE mode
NORMAL
SPORT
ECO
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
OYD056039L
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
ECO fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine and
transaxle system operating parameters. Fuel efficiency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the ECO mode is selected, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to
show that the Active
ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, it does not
turn off even though the
engine is restarted
again. To turn off the
system,
press
the
DRIVE MODE button
again.
5 63
Driving your vehicle
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced even though you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the Active Eco
System is activated to improve fuel
efficiency.
5 64
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited according to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
SPORT dynamic driving by automatically adjusting the
steering wheel, engine
and transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT
indicator (yellow) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode
is activated, and the
engine start/stop button
is turned off and on it will
change to NORMAL
mode. To turn on the
SPORT mode press
DRIVE MODE button
again.
Driving your vehicle
• If the system is activated:
- While holding vehicle
speed, it maintains the
gear and RPM for some
time even though the
accelerator pedal is not
depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽ NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.
5 65
Driving your vehicle
LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
When the system detects the vehicle
straying from its lane, it alerts the
driver with a visual and audible warning, while applying a slight countersteering torque, trying to prevent the
vehicle from moving out of its lane.
WARNING - LKAS
OYDM056083
OYDM056082
The Lane Keeping Assist System
detects lane markers on the road,
and assists the driver’s steering to
help keep the vehicle between lanes.
5 66
Limitations
The LKAS is a supplemental
system and should not be solely
relied upon by the driver. Do not
attempt sudden steering maneuvers while the LKAS is activated.
If the vehicle is driven at high
speeds, the LKAS may not
adjust the steering wheel. It is
the driver's responsibility to
always pay attention to the road
and maintain control over the
steering wheel while driving.
• The steering wheel is not continuously controlled so if the vehicle
speed is very fast when leaving a
lane the vehicle may not be controlled by the system.
• It is the responsibility of the driver
to drive safely.
• Do not steer the steering wheel
suddenly when the steering wheel
is being assisted by the system.
• LKAS prevents the driver from
moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not
solely rely on the system but
always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.
• Always check the road condition
and surroundings and be cautious
when the system cancels, does not
operate or malfunctions.
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield near
the rearview mirror.
Driving your vehicle
• The system detects lane markers
and controls the steering wheel by
a camera, therefore, if the lane
markers are hard to detect, the
system may not work properly.
Please refer to "Driver's Attention".
• Do not remove any LKAS parts or
apply impact.
• Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if the sunlight
is reflected.
• Loud audio sounds may interfere
with the passenger from hearing
warning chimes.
• Always have your hands on the
steering wheel while the LKAS system is activated. If you continue to
drive with your hands off the steering
wheel after the "Hand on" warning,
the system will not control steering
automatically. When system does
not control steering automatically, if
you hold steering wheel, system will
control steering automatically
• If you drive very fast, the vehicle
may stray out of the lane. Always be
cautious when using the system.
• LKAS indicator
- green : LKAS
- white : LDWS or System Ready
- yellow : FAIL
LKAS operation
OYDM056081N
• To turn on the LKAS, push the button with the ignition switch in the
ON position.
• The LKAS indicator (green) will illuminate.
• To turn off the system, press the
button again. The indicator turns off.
5 67
Driving your vehicle
LKAS activation
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist
System is a supplemental system to prevent the driver from
leaving the lane. However, the
driver should not solely rely on
the system but always check the
road conditions when driving.
OYDM056084
• The LKAS screen will appear on
the LCD display if the system is
activated.
• When both lanes are detected and
all the conditions to activate the
LKAS are satisfied, the steering
wheel will be controlled (green
steering wheel indicator will illuminate).
5 68
• If the system detects a lane, the
color changes from black to white.
• If the system detects the left lane,
the left lane color will change from
black to white.
• If the system detects the right lane,
the right lane color will change
from black to white.
• Both lanes must be detected for
the system to fully activate.
• If only one of the lane is detected,
the system will warn (warning beep
and blinking yellow lane) the driver
when the driver crosses the detected lane.
Driving your vehicle
Warning
■ Left lane
■ Left lane
■ Right lane
■ Right lane
OYDM056088/OYDM056087
• If you cross a lane, the lane you
cross will blink (yellow) and symbol
will blink green on LCD with an
audible warning during max 3 seconds.
• If the steering wheel appears, the
system will control the vehicle’s
steering to prevent the vehicle from
crossing the lane.
OYDM056086/OYDM056085
OQLE045243
• If all the conditions to activate
LKAS are not satisfied, the system
will convert to LDWS and warn the
driver only when the driver crosses
the lane markers.
• If the driver takes one’s hands off
the steering wheel while the LKAS
is activated, the system will warn
the driver after several seconds
with a visual and audible warning.
✽ NOTICE
The warning message may appear
late according to road conditions.
Therefore, always have your hands
on the steering wheel while driving.
5 69
Driving your vehicle
If the driver still does not have one’s
hand on the steering wheel after several seconds, LKAS does not activate.
While LKAS deactivation, if the driver have one’s hand on the steering
wheel, LKAS activate again.
✽ NOTICE
• The driver is responsible for accurate steering.
• Turn off the system and drive the
vehicle personally in below situations.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel needs to
be controlled by the driver frequently.
5 70
✽ NOTICE
• Even though the steering is assisted by the system, the driver may
control the steering.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is
assisted by the system than when it
is not.
The system will be cancelled when:
• Vehicle speed is below 56 km/h (35
mph) and over 177 km/h (110 mph).
• Only one lane is detected.
• Always turn on the turn signal to
change lanes. If you change lanes
without the turn signal on, the
steering wheel might be controlled.
• The hazard warning light is on.
• The width of the lane is below 2.6 m
and over 4.5 m.
• ESC(Electronic Stability Control)
and VSM(Vehicle stability management) are activated.
• When the system is on or after
changing a lane, drive in the middle of the lane. If not, the system
will not provide the steering assist
function.
• The steering will not be assisted
when you drive fast on a sharp
curve.
• The steering will not be assisted
when you change lanes fast.
• The steering will not be assisted
when you brake suddenly.
Driving your vehicle
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or many other
things.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as passing
through a tunnel.
• Not turning on the headlight or
the light is weak even at night or in
a tunnel.
• Difficult to distinguish the color of
the lane marker from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road such as sunlight, streetlight or
the light of oncoming vehicles.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct light.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane marker is damaged or
indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
marker.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane marker.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
• Placing something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of
you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane marker is more than two.
• The lane marker in a tunnel is hard
to distinguish due to dust or grease.
• The lane marker is hard to distinguish after raining at night.
• The lane marker is hard to distinguish due to dust.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• MDPS (motor driven power steering) is not operational.
• Some objects are attached in steering wheel.
• The windshield is fogged by
humid air in the vehicle.
• The distance from the vehicle
ahead is very short or the vehicle
ahead drives covering the lane line.
• The lane line is merged or divided.
• Driving through a toll plaza or toll
gate.
• Driving on uneven surface
• An object on roadside which may
resemble road markers.
5 71
Driving your vehicle
LKAS fail indicator
LKAS malfunction
OYDM056089
• If there is a problem with the system a message will appear. If the
problem continues the LKAS fail
indicator will illuminate.
5 72
When there is a problem with the system do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning
the engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by
the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,
etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on
the camera lens
OYDM056089
The LKAS fail indicator (yellow) will
illuminate with an audible warning if
the LKAS is not working properly. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
If the problem is not solved, we recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Driving your vehicle
LKAS function change
The driver can change LKAS to Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
or change the LKAS mode between
Standard LKA and Active LKA by
selecting 'User Settings', 'Driving
Assist', and ‘Lane Keeping Assist
System’ on the LCD display. The system is automatically set to Standard
LKA.
Lane Departure Warning (LDWS)
• The system can be converted to
LKA to LDW at the User setting
mode.
• Refer to User setting in section 4.
• LDWS alerts the driver with a visual and audible warning when the
system detects the vehicle straying
from its lane.
• If the LDWS is operating the indicator green/white will illuminate.
• The steering wheel will not be controlled.
Active LKA
• LKAS operates for a vehicle to
keep the region of lane center
more efficiently.
• The steering assistance is activated more frequently and earlier than
standard LKA.
• LDW is generated when the vehicle is about to cross the line.
Standard LKA
• LKAS only starts intervention when
the vehicle is predicted to cross the
line.
• It's useful to a driver who dislikes
frequent intervention by LKAS
• LDW is generated when the vehicle is about to cross the line.
5 73
Driving your vehicle
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OUM054176L
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses toward the rear sides of the
vehicle and provides and early warning to the driver.
5 74
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 10 km/h (6
mph) faster than the other vehicle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rearward, and the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle in the left or
right side, the system will warn
you.
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemental system. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for proper and safe lane changing procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing lanes.
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(18.6 mph).
3. Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
WARNING
OYD056040L
The indicator on the switch will illuminate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h
(18.6 mph), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the vehicle is turned off, the system
will remember the last settings upon
restart.
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
5 75
Driving your vehicle
1st stage
- The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
2nd stage
OUM054028
OUM054029
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
5 76
When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and an alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
✽ NOTICE
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
OYDM056065
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
Warning message
The message (“Blind Spot Detection
disabled. Radar blocked”) will appear
to notify the driver if there are foreign
substances on the surface or inside
the rear bumper or it is hot near the
rear bumper. The light on the switch
and the system will turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign substance on
the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approximately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message (“Check BSD
System”) will appear and the light on
the switch will turn off. The system
will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
5 77
Driving your vehicle
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
OYD056047L
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the system off.
• If the vehicle is turned off, the RCTA
system will remember the last settings upon restart. Always turn the
RCTA system off when not in use.
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 1.6 feet ~
65 feet based on the side direction.
If the approaching vehicle speed is
4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22
mph) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range can vary based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
Warning type
OJF055196L
■ Type B
■ Type B
■ Type C
OYD057101N/OJF055105L
■ Type C
OYD057102N/OJF055106L
5 78
Driving your vehicle
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound and the warning light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected object is not in your
way, move the vehicle away from
the detected object slowly; and the
warning will cancel once the object
has been safely cleared.
• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by a barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing ability may be deteriorated.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
• The system may not work properly if the bumper has been replaced
or if repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs according to the road's width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• If the road is very wide the system
may not detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic interference.
Limitations condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor cover
is dirty with rain, snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or obstructed with foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle racks, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle has significantly changed such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
5 79
Driving your vehicle
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A substantial amount of metallic
objects such as a construction
area.
- A large vehicle is nearby such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If two vehicles near each other
accelerate together.
- When another vehicle passes by at
a high rate of speed.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep,
uneven road.
- When another vehicle drives very
close the back bumper/trunk.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
5 80
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is very high or low.
- When bike racks, etc. cover the
sensor.
- When reversing from a parking
space with pillars or metal structures.
- When you are reversing and if the
detected vehicle is simultaneously
reversing.
- If there are small objects like shopping carts and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to another vehicle.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
- When driving on wet surface.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror housing is very dirty.
- The window is very dirty.
- The windows are tinted very dark.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many plants.
Driving your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
5 81
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many kilometers (miles) you can get
from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
5 82
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warmup period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is reduced by crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down
when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
5 83
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with
a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine,
and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the
transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle
rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire damage.
5 84
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage.
WARNING - Sudden
vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
OBH058035L
OMC035004
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
5 85
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
5 86
Driving in the rain
1JBB3303
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as
soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits,
refer to "Tires and wheels" in
section 7.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
WARNING - Under/Over
Inflated Tires
Always check the tires for proper inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
5 87
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions
1JBB3305
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
5 88
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and
handling
of
your
car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids. You need to
keep sufficient distance between the
vehicle in operation in front and your
vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Check spark plugs and ignition system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
5 89
Driving your vehicle
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.
5 90
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window
scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
TRAILER TOWING
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information label
OYDM066018
OYDNEM4010N
OYDNEM4012C
OYDM066019
OYDM066020
OYDNEM4010A
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
OYDNEM4012
OYDM066021
5 91
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle capacity weight:
385 kg (849 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
5 92
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit 1.Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five
68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
A
Example 2
B
C
A
C190F01JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
136 kg
Weight
(300 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
Available Cargo and 249 kg
Luggage weight (549 lbs)
Example 3
B
C
A
C190F02JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
340 kg
Weight
(750 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 45 kg
Luggage weight
(99 lbs)
B
C
C190F03JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
385 kg
Weight
(849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
365 kg
Weight
(805 lbs)
73 kg (161 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 20 kg
Luggage weight
(44 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 93
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
5 94
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
WARNING - Over
loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle
capacity
weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Over
loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling--all of which may result in
a crash.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
5 95
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
5 96
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly. . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . . 6-7
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . 6-8
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
OYDEEM2001CN
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme
caution
when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
6 2
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by
pressing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
(if smart key equipped).
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed down
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Automatic
transaxle / Dual Clutch Transaxle)
or reverse (manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an Automatic
transaxle/ Dual Clutch Transaxle,
be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is discharged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tightened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
6 4
WARNING - Push/
pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coil and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables
CAUTION - 12 volt
battery
(-)
(-)
(+)
Discharged battery
(+)
Booster battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING - Sulfuric
acid risk
When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corrosive.
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you will experience a
loss of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P
(Automatic transaxle/ Dual Clutch
Transaxle) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking
brake. If the air conditioning is on,
turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
6 6
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts.
5.If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant leaks, stop
the engine immediately and call
the nearest authorized Kia dealer
for assistance.
WARNING - Radiator
cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of
the opening and cause serious
burns.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
Introduction
✽ NOTICE
The Tire Mobility Kit sealing compound in the bottle is to be used for
one tire only. See your Kia dealership for additional replacement
sealant bottles.
WARNING - Tire wall
OYDNEM2013
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the one supplied canister of sealant
in the Tire Mobility Kit is to only
enough sealant for one flat tire.
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
OYDM077088N
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer to have the tire
repaired or replaced.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step procedure to temporarily seal
the puncture.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
6 8
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below 30°C (-22°F).
What to do in an emergency
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
expiration date noted on the
sealant bottle. This can increase
the risk of tire failure.
WARNING - Sealant
OEL069020
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Strictly
follow
the
specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1.Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
2.Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3.Ensure that button (8) on the compressor is not pressed.
4.Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5.Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (4)so
that the bottle is upright.
✽ NOTICE
If a foreign object is seen that has
punctured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
6 10
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
OYDM077088N
6.Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7.Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet using the
cable and connectors.
8.With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
9.Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and we recommend that
inspect at an authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1.After driving approximately 7 ~ 10
km (4 ~ 6 miles or about 10 min),
stop at a safe location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switch on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽ NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire reading, the compressor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
6 11
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors at an authorized dealer.
6 12
Technical Data
System voltage : DC 12 V
Working voltage : DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating : max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures :
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure :
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor : 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle : 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight :
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume :
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
Sealant warranty :
5 years (sealant.)
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (IF EQUIPPED)
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
Jack and tools
WARNING - Changing
tires
OTF060002
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment.
Remove the luggage under tray out
of the way to reach the equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is only
supported by a jack since the
vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support stands.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the road
and from the vehicle to be raised with
the jack.
WARNING -Running vehiAlways move the vehicle completely
off the road and onto the shoulder
before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on firm level
ground. If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.
Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle;
never use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack support.
cle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Changing tires
1JBA6504
OED066033
ONF068004
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
6 14
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or
P (Park) for Automatic transaxle/
Dual Clutch Transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flashers.
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OYDM066001
OYDDEM2004
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
OYDM066002
7.Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack at
the designated locations under the
frame. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with two
tabs and a raised dot to index with
the jack.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle in
the correct jack position; never
use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
OYDM077087N
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1 in). Before
removing the wheel lug nuts, make
sure the vehicle is stable and that
there is no chance for movement
or slippage.
6 16
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the wheel
on the hub, pick up the spare tire,
line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel lined
up with the top stud. Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can be slid over the other
studs.
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure
that there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that prevents the wheel from fitting
solidly against the hub.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OTF060007
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
nut following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are tight.
Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing the wheels, have
an authorized Kia dealer tighten the
wheel nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
11~13 kgf.m (79~94 lbf.ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
6 17
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Replacing
lug nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
6 18
WARNING - Wheel studs
Do not drive your vehicle with
damaged wheel studs. If the
studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
You should drive carefully when the
compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and rim at
the first opportunity.
The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Spare tire
Do not operate your vehicle on
this compact spare at speeds
over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
compact spare tire is for emergency use only. The original tire
should be repaired or replaced
as soon as possible to avoid
failure of the spare.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should you
exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher
speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough
for the road conditions to avoid all
hazards. Any road hazard, such as a
pothole or debris, could seriously
damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
6 19
What to do in an emergency
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
6 20
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
• Type A
OHYK064001
• Type B
OHYK064005
• Type C
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with Automatic transaxle/
Dual Clutch Transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 21
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
dolly
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
HXD02
WARNING - Side and
curtain air bag
OMC045012
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
6 22
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed. The side and curtain air bag may deploy when
the ignition is ON, and the
rollover sensor detects the situation as a rollover.
HXD03
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook (front)
(if equipped)
Emergency towing
• Front
CAUTION - Towing gear
OYDM066004
position
Always place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the
transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
• Rear (4 Door)
OYDM066003
1.Remove the towing hook from the
tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OYDM066014
• Rear (5 Door)
OYD066013
6 23
What to do in an emergency
If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull
a vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
6 24
• Attach a towing strap to the towing
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
OYF062017
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during towing.
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
If the car is being towed with all four
wheels on the ground, it can be
towed only from the front. Be sure
that the transmission is in neutral. Be
sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC
position. A driver must be in the
towed vehicle to operate the steering
and brakes.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle/ Dual Clutch
Transaxle
• To avoid serious damage to
the Automatic transaxle/ Dual
Clutch Transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10
mph) and drive less than 1.5
km (1 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check for an
Automatic transaxle/ Dual
Clutch Transaxle fluid leak
under your vehicle. If the
Automatic transaxle/ Dual
Clutch Transaxle fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or
towing dolly must be used.
6 25
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-29
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-50
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
• Engine compartment fuse panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
• Engine room (Battery terminal cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
• Front lights replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
• Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . 7-84
• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-84
• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
• License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
• Interior lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
7
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 7-100
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 MPI Engine
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
■ Gasoline Nu 2.0 GDI Engine
5. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Negative battery terminal
10. Fuse box
* : if equipped
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYDM076017/OYDM076078
7 3
Maintenance
■ Gasoline Gamma 1.6T-GDI Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OJFA075002
7 4
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is
provided in your Warranty &
Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
7 5
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 6
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
rings, bracelets, watches, and
necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
7 7
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
7 8
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
check the hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following
conditions
apply,
follow
the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal
temperature or less than 16 km(10
miles) in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia
dealer for details.
*2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*4 : Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months
*5 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
7 10
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections (including booster)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4 - MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
7 12
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect fuel tank, fuel filler cap, ceinster, vapor hose
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
(Continued)
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
(Continued)
7 14
Maintenance
(Continued)
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑ Add fuel additive *
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
2
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
4
* Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: : Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles ) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel tank, fuel filler cap, ceinster, vapor hose
❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *5
(Every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
7 16
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 17
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
(Continued)
7 18
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles ) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 19
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect fuel tank, fuel filler cap, ceinster, vapor hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
7 20
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - MPI/GDI Engine
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
(Continued)
7 21
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
4
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 22
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect fuel tank, fuel filler cap, ceinster, vapor hose
❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *5
(Every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months)
(Continued)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months after
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
(Continued)
7 23
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
4
* Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
(Continued)
7 24
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - Turbo GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
7 25
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake hoses, lines and connections
(including booster)
❑ Inspect dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive belt *3 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72
months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect fuel tank, fuel filler cap, ceinster, vapor hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Rotate tires (Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
7 26
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *4
- MPI/GDI Engine
: Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *2
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free paly
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*4 Engine oil (1.6 TGDI) Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles)
or 6 months
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
EVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES)
OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 5,000 KM (3,000 MILES)
OR 6 MONTHS
DRIVING
CONDITION
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
SPARK PLUGS
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
B, H
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES)
A, C, E, F, G, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
R
EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (MPI/GDI)
R
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (Turbo GDI)
R
AIR CLEANER FILTER
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
(Continued)
7 27
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR
EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS
AND ROTORS
REAR DISC BRAKE/PADS, PARKING
BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER
ARM BALL JOINT
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in heavy dust condition
7 28
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a
lifetime fuel filter that integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance
or replacement is not needed but
depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like
fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, fuel
filter inspection or replace is needed.
The fuel filter be Inspected or
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
7 29
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
7 30
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
Spark plugs
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer
in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Brake hoses and lines
Parking brake
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake/clutch fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
7 31
Maintenance
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Dual clutch transmission Fluid
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7 32
When checking engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid,
always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant or fluid. This is especially important in dusty or sandy
areas and when the vehicle is used
on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Replace
engine oil
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
OYD076013L
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and reinsert it fully.
7 33
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
OYDM076084
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine components.
7 34
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The
electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
OYDEMC2055
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant or distilled (deionized) water to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring
the level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent coolant addition is
required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
7 35
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
CAUTION - Removing
radiator cap
Never attempt to
remove the radiator
cap while the engine
is operating or hot.
Doing so might lead
to cooling system and
engine damage.
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Ambient
Temperature
Antifreeze
Water
-15°C (5°F)
35
65
-25°C (-13°F)
40
60
-35°C (-31°F)
50
50
-45°C (-49°F)
60
40
OYD076028L
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure.
7 36
Maintenance
Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop.
Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
7 37
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch*
fluid level
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake/clutch fluid in
brake/clutch system. Small
amounts of improper fluids
(such as engine oil) can cause
damage to the brake/clutch system.
OYD076024L
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*
fluid contamination.
* if equipped
7 38
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings and/or
clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch*
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When
changing
and
adding
brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
large quantity of fresh tap water.
Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Brake/clutch
fluid
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the washer fluid
level
WARNING - Coolant
Checking the parking brake
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
WARNING - Windshield
OMD070007
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
Do not
washer
washer
humans
fluid
drink the windshield
fluid. The windshield
fluid is poisonous to
and animals.
WARNING - Flammable
fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flammable under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
OYDDDR2105
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20
kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
7 39
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
OMD070010
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
7 40
OMD070011
OMD070012
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter
maintenance
• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
nongenuine part could damage the air flow sensor.
7 41
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
Filter replacement
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
OYDDMC2005
OYDDMC2006
1. Open the glove box and pull the
support strap (1).
7 42
2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
Maintenance
OYDDMC2007
OMG079027
3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
7 43
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade inspection
1JBA5122
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.
7 44
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
OHM078059
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip (1) and slide
the blade assembly downward (2).
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
7 45
Maintenance
OHM078060
OHG070043
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
7 46
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
OYDDMC2008
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach
of
children
because batteries contain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or working near a battery.
Always provide ventilation when working in an
enclosed space.
7 47
Maintenance
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention immediately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized Kia dealer to
be recycled.
7 48
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
When the vehicle remains unused for
a long time while tempertures are
low, disconnect the battery and keep
it indasrs.
WARNING - Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Maintenance
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.
• Auto down window (See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Clock (See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 4)
7 49
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
WARNING - Tire underin-
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 50
OMD060012N
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation
(70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 51
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 52
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
Maintenance
Rotate radial tires that have an directional tread pattern only from front to
rear and not from right to left.
Do not use the compact spare tire for
tire rotation.
Without a spare tire
WARNING - Mixing tire
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
types
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
7 53
Maintenance
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
Tire replacement
Tread wear indicator
✽ NOTICE
OEN076053
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7 54
We recommend replacing tires with
the same make and model originally
supplied with the vehicle; not doing
so may affect driving performance.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
Tire traction
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 55
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 56
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2017.
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7 57
Maintenance
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
7 58
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
7 59
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
7 60
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 2.3
kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Maintenance
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars,"
that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
7 61
Maintenance
Snow tires
Radial-ply tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi
) more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver's side of
the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
7 62
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
Maintenance
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
✽ NOTICE
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving
on a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
7 63
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type
Normal
■ Cartridge type
Normal
■ Multi fuse
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
Blown
Blown
OXM073122
7 64
A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver's side panel bolster, others in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the fuse
will be melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver's side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one
of the same rating.
Before replacing a blown fuse, move
to safe place, turn off the engine and
all electric devices, and disconnect the
negative battery cable.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Four kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, battery fuse terminal and
multi fuse type for higher amperage
ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It
may cause extensive wiring
damage and a possible fire.
CAUTION - Fuse replacement
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring to the vehicle.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ depending on equipment/options.
CAUTION - Fuse replacement
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system malfunction.
WARNING - Electrical Fire
Instrument panel fuse replacement
• Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed.
Failure to do so can result in a
vehicle fire.
• We recommend that you do not
remove fuses, relays and terminals that are fastened with
bolts or nuts. If they are not
completely re-installed, such
looseness may cause electrical
arcing and a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts need
replacement, consult with an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
OYDDMC2009
7 65
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
OYDDMC2010
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter
fuse.
7 66
OYDDMC2040
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuse
switch to prevent battery discharge if
your vehicle is parked without being
operated for prolonged periods.
Use the following procedures before
parking the vehicle for prolonged
periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover
and move the fuse switch up to the
OFF position.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
• If the fuse switch is in the OFF
position, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps,
etc., will not operate. Some items
must be reset after replacement.
Refer to “Battery” in this chapter.
• Even when the fuse switch is in the
OFF position, the battery can still
be discharged by operation of the
headlights or other electrical
devices.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Fuse panel
OYDDMC2011
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2.Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up.
When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the
clip designed for changing fuses
located in the engine room fuse
box. Upon removal, securely insert
reserve fuse of equal quantity.
covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the
engine
compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
7 67
Maintenance
Main fuse
CAUTION
Multi fuse
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed. If
the battery cap is not securely
closed, moisture may enter the
system and damage the electrical components.
OMD070021
OMD070022
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel in the
engine compartment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
7 68
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
OYDDMC2012
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OYDNMC5014
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ depending on equipment/options.
7 69
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse
panel
OYDDMC2013
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OYDM076074
7 70
Maintenance
Engine room
(Battery terminal cover)
OYDNMC2059
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OYDM076075
7 71
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
P/SEAT DRV
SPARE 4
P/WDW RH
TRUNK
P/WDW LH
DR LOCK
SPARE 3
POWER OUTLET 1
S/HEATER RR
MODULE 8
SPARE 2
MODULE 9
Fuse rating
30A
25A
25A
10A
25A
20A
20A
20A
20A
10A
7.5A
15A
MODULE 1
10A
A/CON
7.5A
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay, GSL PTC Heater Relay)
MODULE 5
7.5A
Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Rear
Seat Warmer LH/RH, Sunroof
HTD MIRR
10A
ECM/PCM, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
INTERIOR LAMP
7.5A
Trunk Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp
MODULE 6
PDM 2
SUNROOF
7.5A
7.5A
20A
Key Solenoid
[With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
Sunroof
7 72
Circuit Protected
Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch
Smart Junction Block (Power Window RH Relay), Passenger Safety Power Window Module
Smart Junction Box (Trunk Relay)
Smart Junction Block (Power Window LH Relay), Driver Safety Power Window Module
Smart Junction Block (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay), ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Cigarette Lighter)
Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
BCM, Smart Key Control Module
Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Handle
Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Digital Clock, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside
Mirror Switch
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
MODULE 2
10A
Electro Chromic Mirror, Multipurpose Check Connector, A/C Control Module, Driver CCS Switch,
Driver/Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver
IMS Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, ATM Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Rear Power
Window Switch LH/RH, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Audio, Dynamic Bending Light Module, Console
Switch LH/RH
HTD STRG
IG 1
WIPER FRT
MULTIMEDIA 2
15A
20A
25A
7.5A
Steering Wheel Heater
W/O Smart Key : E/R Junction Block (Fuse - TCU1, ECU 3, ABS 3)
Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (Wiper Relay), Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
-
MEMORY
7.5A
Driver IMS Module, BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Instrument
Cluster, Data Link Connector, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror,
MODULE 7
PDM 3
MDPS
MODULE 3
10A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
ICM Relay Box (Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay, Folding Relay, Unfolding Relay)
[With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
MDPS Unit
Instrument Cluster
START
7.5A
[With Burglar Alarm & W/O Smart Key & W/O IMMO.] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
[W/O Burglar Alarm or With Smart Key or With IMMO.] Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch
MULTIMEDIA 1
BRAKE SWITCH
PDM 1
POWER OUTLET FRT
A/BAG IND
15A
10A
20A
20A
7.5A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
Smart Key Control Module
Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Power Outlet)
Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
MODULE 4
10A
Crash Pad Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Digital Clock, BCM, Blind Spot
Detection Radar LH/RH, MDPS Unit, AEB Module,
Sport Mode Switch, AEB Radar
A/BAG
15A
SRS Control Module, Weight Classification Module
7 73
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name
MDPS
Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 1 (4CH), Fuse - MODULE6, MODULE7, MODULE9,
P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH, TRUNK)
40A
40A
40A
40A
60A
ESC Module
C/Fan Relay
RR HTD Relay
Blower Relay
GSL PTC Heater Relay
B+2
60A
Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 3 (4CH), ARISU-LT IPS 4 (4CH), IPS 5 (2CH), Fuse PDM 1, P/SEAT DRV BRAKE SWITCH, S/HEATER RR)
B/UP LAMP
10A
A/T,DCT : Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Combination
Lamp (In) LH/RH M/T : Back-Up Lamp Switch
TCU 1
ABS 3
ECU 3
A/CON SWITCH
WIPER FRT
B+3
ECU 6
GSL PTC HEATER
DEICER
STOP LAMP
15A
10A
10A
10A
10A
50A
40A
50A
15A
10A
A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, DCT : Transaxle Range Switch, TCM
ESC Module
ECM/PCM, Vacuum Pump
A/C Control Module, Blower Motor, Blower Relay, ECM/PCM, Blower Resistor
ECM/PCM, Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (Wiper FRT Relay)
Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse - PDM 2, DR LOCK, SUNROOF)
EMS Block (Engine Control Relay, Fuse - ECU 4, A/CON, F/PUMP)
GSL PTC HEATER RELAY
ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
Stop Signal Electronic Module
ABS 1
C/FAN
MULTI FUSE
RR HTD
BLOWER
GSL PTC HEATER
7 74
Circuit Protected
60A
B+1
FUSE
Fuse rating
80A
MDPS Unit
Maintenance
Fuse Name
S/HEATER FRT
HORN
ECU 5
FUSE
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
20A
Driver/Passenger Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
15A
Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
15A
ECM/PCM
IG 2
40A
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, Start 1 Relay, With Smart Key : PDM 4 (IG2) Relay, Start 1
Relay
ABS 2
IG 1
40A
40A
ESC Module
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key : PDM 3 (IG1) Relay, PDM 2 (ACC) Relay
WIPER RR
15A
Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor, ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Ignition Switch,
PDM 4 (IG2) Relay
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 4
40A
20A
40A
TCM
TCM
TCM
7 75
Maintenance
Fuse & Relay Box( NU 2.0L MPI/ NU 2.0 GDI)
Relay NO.
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E52
Relay Name
RR HTD RELAY
WIPER RELAY
GSL PTC RELAY
PDM 2 (ACC) RELAY
START 1 RELAY
PDM 3 (IG1) RELAY
C/FAN RELAY
HORN RELAY
PDM 4 (IG2) RELAY
BLOWER RELAY
C/FAN 2 RELAY
Type
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MINI
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
Junction Block (GAMMA 1.6L T-GDI)
Relay NO.
E41
E42
E43
E44
E45
E46
E47
E48
E49
E50
E52
7 76
Relay Name
RR HTD RELAY
WIPER RELAY
GSL PTC RELAY
PDM 2 (ACC) RELAY
START 1 RELAY
PDM 3 (IG1) RELAY
C/FAN RELAY
HORN RELAY
PDM 4 (IG2) RELAY
BLOWER RELAY
C/FAN 2 RELAY
Type
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MINI
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
Maintenance
EMS Block (NU 2.0L MPI)
Fuse Name
F/PUMP
ECU 4
A/CON
INJECTOR
SPARE
IGN COIL
ECU 1
Fuse rating
20A
15A
15A
10A
10A
20A
20A
SENSOR 2
10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CON
COMP Relay) Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)
SENSOR 1
10A
Oil Control Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust), Oil Control Valve #3 (Signal), Electronic
Thermostat
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10A
15A
20A
-
Relay Name
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY
A/CON COMP RELAY
F/PUMP RELAY
Circuit Protected
F/Pump Relay
PCM
A/CON COMP Relay
EMS Block (F/Pump Relay)
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, EMS Block (F/PUMP Relay)
ECM/PCM
Type
PCB
PLUG MICRO
PLUG MICRO
7 77
Maintenance
EMS Block (NU 2.0L GDI)
Fuse Name
F/PUMP
ECU 4
A/CON
INJECTOR
ECU 2
IGN COIL
ECU 1
Fuse rating
20A
15A
15A
10A
10A
20A
20A
SENSOR 2
10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CON
COMP Relay)
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)Oil Control
Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10A
10A
15A
20A
-
Relay Name
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY
A/CON COMP RELAY
F/PUMP RELAY
7 78
Circuit Protected
F/Pump Relay
PCM/ECM
A/CON COMP Relay
EMS Block (F/Pump Relay)
PCM/ECM
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser
PCM/ECM
Type
PCB
PCB
PCB
Maintenance
EMS Block GAMMA 1.6L T-GDI
Fuse Name
F/PUMP
ECU 4
A/CON
INJECTOR
ECU 2
IGN COIL
ECU 1
Fuse rating
20A
15A
15A
10A
10A
20A
20A
Circuit Protected
F/Pump Relay
PCM/ECM
A/CON COMP Relay
EMS Block (F/Pump Relay)
PCM/ECM
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser
PCM/ECM
SENSOR 2
10A
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, EMS Block (A/CON
COMP Relay)
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Junction Block (C/Fan 2 Relay)Oil Control
Valve #1 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #2 (Exhaust)
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10A
10A
15A
20A
-
Relay Name
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY
A/CON COMP RELAY
F/PUMP RELAY
Type
PCB
PCB
PCB
7 79
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position
and turn off the lights to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION - Light
replacement
Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb. This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlight assembly to get to the
bulb(s). Removing/installing the
headlight assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
Front lights replacement
OYDM076048
(1) Headlight (High)/Daytime running
light (DRL)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front fog light*
(5) Front position light*
(6) Side marker
* : if equipped
7 80
Maintenance
Headlight bulb
OHD076046
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If the
bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only when
installed in a headlight.
If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately and
carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing
a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down
before handling it.
Headlight (bulb type)
Low
HIgh
OYD076010L
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket-connector.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
7 81
Maintenance
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Front side marker/Front turn signal light
OYDM076073
OYDDMC2043
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts and
remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle. If you
can reach to the bulb without
removing the headlamp assembly,
you don’t need to do step 3.
4. Disconnect the power connec
tor(s) from the back of the head
lamp assembly.
7 82
Front side marker
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the headlamp assembly,
bumper to the body of the vehicle.
Maintenance
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Front fog light (if equipped)
■ 4 Door, 5 Door
OYD076012L
OYD076085L
Front turn signal light
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
■ 5 Door Turbo
OYDM076083
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the under cover by rotating the screws.
3. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
4. Disconnect the power connector.
7 83
Maintenance
5.Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
6.Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing
and turn the socket clockwise.
7.Connect the power connector.
8.Reinstall the front under cover.
Outside Mirrors with Turn
Signal Indicators (if equipped)
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
• 4 Door
Type A
OYDM076079
OYDDMC2017
• 4 Door
Type B
If the light (LED) does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer
OYDM076080
(1) Tail and Stop and Side marker lamp
(2) Tail and Side marker lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Stop lamp
(5) Back up lamp
(6) Rear turn signal lamp
7 84
Maintenance
Outside lamp
• 5 Door
Type A
• 5 Door
• 4 Door
OYDDMC3075
• 5 Door
Type B
OYDDMC3064
OYDDMC2029
• 4 Door
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
OYDDMC3063
(1) Stop and tail lamp
(2) Tail lamp
(3) Back-up lamp
(4) Rear turn signal lamp
(5) Tail stop lamp or stop lamp (LED)
If the light (LED) does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer
• 5 Door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the
vehicle.
7 85
Maintenance
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
• 5 Door
Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal
lamp
• 4 Door
Type A
OYDDMC3068
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7 86
OYDDMC2030
• 4 Door
Type B
OYDDMC2031
Maintenance
• 5 Door
Type A
OYDDMC3068
• 5 Door
Type B
OYDDMC3067
1. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
4. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
5. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
Stop and tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Inside lamp
• 4 Door
OYDDMC2021
OYDDMC2022CN
• 4 Door
1. Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove
the cover.
7 87
Maintenance
3. Disconnect the connector and
then remove the nuts by turning
the nuts counter clockwise.
• 5 Door
OYDDMC3065
OYDDMC2023
• 4 Door
Back up lamp
1. Take the lamp assembly out.
2. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket.
5. Install the light assembly to the
trunk.
6. Reinstall the nuts and connector
and then the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
7 88
OYDDMC3070
• 5 Door
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover.
Maintenance
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
Stop/tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
• 4 Door
OYD046058
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OYDDMC2025
• 4 Door
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the socket by turning it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots.
7 89
Maintenance
• 5 Door
A
B
OYDDMC3072
OYDDMC3074
• 5 Door
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7 90
OYDDMC3073
OYDDMC3071
4. Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
5. Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
Maintenance
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
Front map lamp
Room lamp
OJF075144L
OMD070043
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
• 4 Door
Vanity mirror lamp
OYDDMC2032
1. Remove the cover by pressing it
as direction of the arrows.
2. Remove the socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb assembly
securely with the retaining screws.
OVG079040
OMD070045
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
• 5 Door
Glove box lamp
OYDEMC2065
OYDDMC3076
7 91
Maintenance
Interior lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
7 92
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
CAUTION - Interior lights
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
CAUTION - Headlight
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean headlight lens with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
7 93
Maintenance
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
7 94
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wetting engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to
re-wax these areas even if the rest of
the vehicle does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chemicals are used in cold weather states to
melt snow and prevent ice accumulation. If these chemicals are not regularly removed, they will corrode the
vehicle underbody and over time damage fuel lines, the fuel tank retention
system, the vehicle suspension, the
exhaust system, and even the body
frame. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration has warned all
vehicle owners of all brands of the
need to take the following steps:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service technicians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for corrosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scaling or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of directional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with
a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels
after driving on salted roads. This
helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
7 95
Maintenance
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
7 96
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle surfaces by
moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the following:
Maintenance
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape and not be trapped inside
to accelerate corrosion.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
7 97
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do
contact the interior parts, wipe them
off immediately. See the instructions
for the proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
7 98
Taking care of leather seats
• Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage of
the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
• Sufficient use of a leather protective may prevent abrasion of the
cover and helps maintain the color.
Be sure to read the instructions
and consult a specialist when
using leather coating or protective
agents.
• Leather with bright colors(beige,
cream beige) is easily contaminated and clear in appearance. Clean
the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
Cleaning the leather seats
• Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic
products(sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
- Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
• Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.)
- Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.
• Oil
- Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover for natural leather
only.
• Chewing gum
- Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Maintenance
Fabric seat cover (If equipped)
Please clean the fabric seats regularly with a vacuum cleaner in consideration of fabric material characteristics. If they are heavily soiled
with beverage stains, etc., use a suitable interior cleaner. To prevent damage to seat covers, wipe off the seat
covers down to the seams with a
large wiping motion and moderate
pressure using a soft sponge or
microfiber cloth.
Velcro closures on clothing or sharp
objects may cause snagging or
scratches on the surface of the
seats.
Make sure not to rub such objects
against the surface.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear windows
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
7 99
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
manual in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
7 100
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.
7 101
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
7 102
Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Specifications & Consumer information
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-7
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
Specifications & Consumer information
ENGINE
Item
Displacement [cc (cu.in)]
Bore x Stroke [mm (in)]
Firing order
No. of cylinders
2.0 MPI
2.0 GDI
1.6 Turbo GDI
1,999 (121.99)
1,999 (121.99)
1,591 (97.1)
81 x 97 (3.19 x 3.82)
81 x 97 (3.19 x 3.82)
77 x 85.4 (3.03 x 3.36)
1→3→4→2
1→3→4→2
1→3→4→2
4, In-line
4, In-line
4, In-line
DIMENSIONS
Item
Overall length
4 Door
5 Door
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
8 2
4 Door
5 Door
195/65 R15 (Steel)
205/55 R16 (Steel)
205/55 R16 (Alloy)
P215/45 R17 (Alloy)
P225/40 R18 (Alloy)
195/65 R15 (Steel)
205/55 R16 (Steel)
205/55 R16 (Alloy)
P215/45 R17 (Alloy)
P225/40 R18 (Alloy)
mm (in)
4,560 (179.5)
4,350 (171.3)
1,780 (70.1)
1,430 (56.3)
1,450 (57.1)
1,563 (61.5)
1,553 (61.1)
1,555 (61.2)
1,557 (61.3)
1,545 (60.8)
1,576 (62.0)
1,566 (61.6)
1,568 (61.7)
1,570 (61.8)
1,558 (61.3)
2,700 (106.3)
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Front
Rear
Light Bulb
Headlamps(Low)
Headlamps(Low)- HID *
Headlamps(High)/Daytime running light (DRL)
Front turn signal lamps
Front position lamps *
Front position lamps (LED type)*
Front fog lamps *
Side Repeater lamps
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) *
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)
Bulb type
Rear tail lamps (Inside)
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)
LED type
Rear Stop/tail lamps (Inside)
Rear turn signal lamps
Back-up lamps
Bulb type
4 Door*
LED type
High mounted stop lamp *
5 Door
LED type
License plate lamps
Wattage
55
25
60
28
5
LED
35
5
LED
28
8
LED
LED
27
16
21
LED
LED
5
Bulb type
H7
D5S
9005HL+
PY28/8W
W5W
LED
H8
WY5W
LED
P28/8W
P28/8W
LED
LED
PY27W
W16W
P21W
LED
LED
W5W
(Continued)
* : If equipped
8 3
Specifications & Consumer information
(Continued)
Light Bulb
Interior
Map lamps *
Room lamps
Vanity mirror lamps *
Luggage lamp *
* : If equipped
8 4
4 Door
5 Door
Wattage
8
8
5
5
8
Bulb type
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Item
Full size tire
Compact spare tire *2
Tire size
Wheel size
195/65R15 91T
6.0J X15
205/55R16 91H
6.5J X16
P215/45R17 87H
7.0J X17
P225/40R18 88V
7.5J X18
T125/80D15 95M
T125/80D16 97M *
4.0T×15
3
4.0T×16
Normal load *1
Maximum load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
Wheel lug nut torque
kgf•m (lbf•ft, N•m)
11~13
(79~94, 107~127)
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons
*2 : If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, it will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit
*3 : Only for P225/40R18 Tire Size
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size may damage the related parts or cause them to operate improperly.
✽ NOTICE
• We recommend replacing tires with the same make and model originally supplied with the vehicle; not doing so
may affect driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please
check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary. Additionally required tire air pressure per km above
sea level: 10.5 kPa (1.5psi)/km
8 5
Specifications & Consumer information
WEIGHT/VOLUME
2.0 MPI
2.0 GDI
1.6 Turbo GDI
4 Door
4 Door
5 Door
M/T
1,740 (3,836)
1,750 (3,858)
1,810 (3,990)
A/T
1,760 (3,880)
1,770 (3,902)
Item
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
DCT
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
1,840 (4,057)
421 (14.9)
421 (14.9)
657 (23.2)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item
Refrigerant
Compressor lubricant
Weight of volume
530 ± 25g
(18.70 ± 0.88 oz)
110 ± 10g
(3.87 ± 0.35 oz)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
8 6
Classification
R-134a
PAG (FD46XG)
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Volume
Classification
MPI/GDI engine
4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)
API Service SM*3,
ILSAC GF-4 or above*4
Turbo GDI engine
4.5 l (4.8 US qt.)
ILSAC GF-5 or above APISN or
above ACEA A5 above
MPI engine
1.7 ~ 1.8 l
(1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt. )
Turbo GDI engine
1.7 ~ 1.8 l
(1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt. )
Lubricant
Engine oil
(drain and refill)
Recommends
*1 *2
Manual transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid
Dual clutch transmission fluid
SAE 70W, API GL-4, TGO-9
HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other
brands meeting the above specification approved by
Kia Motors Corp.
1.9 ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
SAE 70W, API GL-4
HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS DCTF HD (GS CALTEX)
8 7
Specifications & Consumer information
Volume
Lubricant
MPI/GDI
engine
M/T
6.0 l (6.34 US qt.)
A/T
5.9 l (6.23 US qt.)
Turbo GDI
engine
M/T
6.1 l (6.45 US qt.)
DCT
6.7 l (7.1 US qt)
Coolant
Brake/clutch fluid
Fuel
Classification
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate
based coolant for cooling device)
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt. )
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
50 l (13.2 US gal.)
Unleaded gasoline
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
8 8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operation (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your
vehicle will be operated in before the
next oil change. Proceed to select
the recommended oil viscosity from
the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Temperature
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
Engine Oil
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
(MPI/GDI)
Engine Oil
(Turbo GDI)
50
120
20W-50
15W-40
10W-30
5W-30, 5W-40
An engine oil displaying this API Certification Mark conforms to
the international Lubricant Specification Advisory Commmittee
(ILSAC). It is recommended to only use engine oils that uphold
this API Certification Mark
This vehicle comes from the factory
with synthetic oil.
8 9
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Frame Number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL
VIN Label
OFS080001
OBH088005N
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
VIN label
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
8 10
OFS080002
The vehicle certification label
attatched on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline 2.0 Engine
OJF085004
■ Gasoline 1.6 T-GDI Engine
OMD0620012N
The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OQLE085010
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
8 11
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 1
Index
I
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 2
Index
A
Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Adding equipment to or modifying your air
bag- equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Occupant detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
SRS Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation
and non-inflation conditions of the air bag). . . . . . 3-52
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
AUX, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Glass antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Steering wheel audio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
I 2
Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Automatic transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) /
Forward collision warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 5-49
Brake operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in
front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
System setting and activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
For best battery service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before entering vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 3
Index
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Limitations condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
C
Checking fluid levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
To decrease the cruising speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
To increase cruise control set speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
40 km/h (25 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
To set cruise control speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . 5-60
To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
D
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-18
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
DRIVE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Dual clutch transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
I 3
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 4
Index
E
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system. . . . 7-100
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 7-3
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
ENGINE START/STOP button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
ENGINE START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button. . . . . . . . 5-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . 7-29
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
F
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Fuel Additives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Engine compartment fuse panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Engine room (Battery terminal cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
H
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
How to use this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
I
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
I 4
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 5
Index
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly. . 6-4
If you have a flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Removing and storing the spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Checking the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit. . . . . . 6-8
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
In case of an emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
LCD window Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Covering shelf (5 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
LCD monitor (clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Ventilated seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
K
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
I 5
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 6
Index
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
LKAS function change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
LKAS malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
LKAS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
LCD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Over view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Trip information (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Front lights replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Interior lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . 7-84
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-84
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System). . . . . . . . . 4-99
Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
I 6
M
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
O
Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
P
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 7
Index
R
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
S
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-8
Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Smart trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Special driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Starting the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Starting the engine with an ignition key. . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
FLEX STEER (5 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tilt and telescoping steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Luggage tray (5 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
I 7
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 8
Index
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
T
Tailgate (5 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Emergency tailgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Tire specification and pressure label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-50
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
I 8
Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Tire traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Trunk (4 Door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Emergency trunk safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
V
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-7
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Cargo weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
YDM CAN (ENG) Index.qxp
9/11/2017
12:44 PM
Page 9
Index
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
W
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Interior light welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Carry emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-89
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-90
Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Wipers and washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 Door). . 4-102
Windshield washers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
I 9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement